Manual Web Lct Mn00327e 002 Ags-20 1.1

WEB LCT AGS-20 Software application for the management of AGS-20 equipment Release 1.1

User manual

MN.00327.E - 002

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark. Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark. Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark. Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

WEB LCT AGS-20 Contents

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 11

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 12 FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 13 LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 14 CHARACTERS SET .............................................................................................................. 15 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 16

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 17 OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 18 Open the WEB LCT page from Browser ............................................................................ 18 Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 19 Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 19 ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 20 Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 21 Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 22 Users area ................................................................................................................... 24 User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 24 [Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 24 [Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 25 Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) ............................................ 25 [Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 25 Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 26 Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 27 Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 27 Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 27 Add equipment to the list......................................................................................... 28 Remove equipment from the list ............................................................................... 28 Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 29 Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) .................................... 29 Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 30 Contextual area............................................................................................................ 31 Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 32 Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 33 Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 33 MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 34

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

1

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 35 MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 36 Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 37 Verify the basic configuration of the equipment........................................................... 37 Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 37 Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment .......................................... 37 Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 37 Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 38 Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................... 38 Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................... 38 Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 39 Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 40 General Info tab ............................................................................................... 40 Equipment Features tab ..................................................................................... 41 Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 44 Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 45 Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure.......... 45 Activate one or more PM measures ........................................................................... 46 Deactivate one or more PM measures ........................................................................ 46 Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures............................... 46 Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures............... 46 Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure...................... 47 Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 49 Performances window........................................................................................ 50 PM measures available ............................................................................................ 54 G828 > ODU ............................................................................. 54 RxPwr > ODU ............................................................................ 54 TxPwr > ODU ............................................................................ 54 ACM > ................................................................................ 55 PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 56 Report & Logger ........................................................................................................... 58 Save the log of the equipment alarms ....................................................................... 58 Delete the log of the equipment alarms ..................................................................... 59 Save the log of the operations executed by the users .................................................. 59 Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................ 59 Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................. 60 Report & Logger contextual area............................................................................... 61 NMS Wake Up Config. ................................................................................................... 62 Verify the Wake Up functionality status...................................................................... 62 Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ............................ 62 Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................. 63 NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area ....................................................................... 64 Wake Up functionality (info) ..................................................................................... 65 Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................. 66 Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment ................................................ 66 Update the software/firmware of the equipment ......................................................... 66 Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller........................ 67 Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................. 68 Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 68 Software Info & Maint contextual area ....................................................................... 69 Equipment Firmware tab .................................................................................... 69 Advanced tab ................................................................................................... 70

2

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Equipment software/firmware (info) .......................................................................... 71 Factory Default of the equipment (info) ..................................................................... 72 Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................. 73 Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ................................... 73 Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)................ 74 Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) .................................................. 74 Backup/Restore Config. contextual area..................................................................... 76 Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info) .................................................. 77 Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................. 78 Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ............................. 78 Enable/disable an alarm .......................................................................................... 78 Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................. 78 Change the severity of an alarm ............................................................................... 79 Alarm Severity Config. contextual area ...................................................................... 80 Alarms management (info) ...................................................................................... 81 Group/User Management ............................................................................................... 82 Groups .................................................................................................................. 83 Verify the user groups ....................................................................................... 83 Add a user group .............................................................................................. 83 Modify a user group .......................................................................................... 84 Delete a user group........................................................................................... 85 Groups contextual area...................................................................................... 86 HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) ................................................................................ 88 SNMP protocol (info) ......................................................................................... 91 FTP/SFTP protocol (info) .................................................................................... 93 Installation and configuration of SSH server ................................................... 95 SSH protocol (info) ........................................................................................... 97 Users .................................................................................................................... 98 Verify the user list............................................................................................. 98 Add a user ....................................................................................................... 98 Modify a user ................................................................................................... 99 Delete a user ..................................................................................................100 Users contextual area.......................................................................................101 Users management (info) .................................................................................102 Permanent Login ...................................................................................................104 Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ............................................................104 Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login .....................................................104 Permanent Login contextual area .......................................................................105 Logged Users ........................................................................................................106 Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................106 Force the logout of a user .................................................................................106 Logged Users contextual area ............................................................................107 Security Management ..................................................................................................108 Services Status Config............................................................................................109 Verify the operating of the communication protocols .............................................109 Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol .....................................109 Services Status Config contextual area ...............................................................110 SSL/HTTP Secure...................................................................................................111 Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol .........................................................111 Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment......................................111 Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment....................................112 Download the SSL certificate in an equipment......................................................112

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3

SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area ......................................................................113 Clients .................................................................................................................114 Ftp/Sftp..........................................................................................................115 Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols ................................115 Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol..................................................115 Modify the FTP access credentials.................................................................115 Modify the SFTP access credentials ...............................................................116 Ftp/Sftp contextual area .............................................................................117 EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................118 Radio Configurator.......................................................................................................119 Verify the Radio Link configuration ...........................................................................119 Create a Radio Link................................................................................................119 Modify a Radio Link ................................................................................................120 Delete a Radio Link ................................................................................................120 Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link..........................................................................121 Radio Configurator contextual area ..........................................................................122 Radio Link (info) ....................................................................................................123 BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................125 Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation .....................................................................................125 Modify the reference band.......................................................................................125 Modify the reference modulation ..............................................................................126 Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation...............................................127 Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation ..........................................127 Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....127 Verify/modify the number of E1’s permanently allocated .............................................127 Verify/modify the Link identification number..............................................................128 BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................129 Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................129 Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................130 General Preset ............................................................................................................131 Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................131 Verify/modify the radio Link label.............................................................................131 General Preset contextual area ................................................................................132 Xpic ...........................................................................................................................133 Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function .............................................133 Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU ...............................................133 Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU ..............................................................133 Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .............................................134 Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ........................................................134 Xpic contextual area...............................................................................................135 XPIC function (info) ...............................................................................................136 BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................137 Ethernet.....................................................................................................................138 Bridge Mode Conf. .................................................................................................139 Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .....................................................139 Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ....................................................139 Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area .....................................................................140 Port Manager ........................................................................................................141 Verify the Ethernet ports configuration................................................................141 Modify the type of interface ...............................................................................141 Modify the enabling status of a port....................................................................142

4

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Activate the loop on line side of a port ................................................................142 Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ............................................................142 Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port...................................142 Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port .................................................143 Modify the transmission speed of a port ..............................................................143 Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port....................................143 Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports .........................143 Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ................................................................144 Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports .................................144 Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .....................................144 Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its priority (User Priority).........................................................................145 Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ...........................................145 Port Manager contextual area ............................................................................146 Physical Interface tab .................................................................................146 Optical tab ................................................................................................148 Data Flow tab ............................................................................................149 Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab..................................................................150 Tunneling tab ............................................................................................150 VLAN ...................................................................................................................152 Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management ........................................152 Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table ...............................152 Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table .............................153 Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch ............153 Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ..........................................153 Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ..........154 Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ..........................................154 Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received on the port ..............................................................................154 Verify the existing static VLANs..........................................................................154 Create one or more static VLANs........................................................................155 Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ............................................................155 Delete one or more static VLANs ........................................................................156 VLAN contextual area .......................................................................................157 Basic Settings tab ......................................................................................157 Port Settings tab ........................................................................................158 Static VLANs tab ........................................................................................159 Prov. Bridge-VLAN .................................................................................................160 Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ........................................160 Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) ......................160 Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area .....................................................................161 C-VID Registration tab ................................................................................161 PEP Configuration tab .................................................................................162 Prov. Bridge-EtherType...........................................................................................163 Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ........................163 Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .......................163 Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area ..............................................................164 Header Compression ..............................................................................................165 Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets ..........................................................................................................165 Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets ..........................................................................................................165 Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets ..165 Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets .........166

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

5

Header Compression contextual area ..................................................................167 Header Compression (info)................................................................................168 RSTP....................................................................................................................169 Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment .............................169 Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function ..........................170 Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function ...........................................170 Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function ..................................................171 Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP)......................171 Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP)............................................171 Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP).................................172 Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP)....172 Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) ......172 Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) ....................................................173 Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port ...................................173 Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) ...................................................173 Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP) .....................174 RSTP contextual area .......................................................................................175 Settings tab ..............................................................................................175 Port Settings tab ........................................................................................177 Port Status tab ..........................................................................................178 STP/RSTP Protocol (info)...................................................................................180 LLF ......................................................................................................................181 Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ..............................181 Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality ......................................181 Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality...................182 Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ........182 Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ....182 Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ......................................................183 Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio ........................................183 Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality .............................................183 Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm ......................................................184 Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ...........................184 LLF contextual area ..........................................................................................185 Bidirectional LLF (info)......................................................................................187 Queue Depth.........................................................................................................188 Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............188 Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output .............188 Queue Depth contextual area ............................................................................189 Statistics ..............................................................................................................191 Interface ........................................................................................................192 Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) ......................192 Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) ................................................192 Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group).....192 Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ..............................193 Interface contextual area ............................................................................194 Interface tab ......................................................................................194 Ethernet tab .......................................................................................194 DCN (LAN 3) ...............................................................................................................197 MNGT Port Configuration ........................................................................................198 Verify the configuration of the management port..................................................198 Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port .......................................198 Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway ...................................................198 Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision ...........................................199

6

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Modify the enabling status of management port ...................................................199 Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port.............199 Modify the transmission speed of the management port ........................................200 Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port ...........................200 Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port ..........................200 MNGT Port Configuration contextual area ............................................................202 Routing Table........................................................................................................204 Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ...........................................................204 Add an element to the Routing Table ..................................................................204 Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table .........................................205 Routing Table contextual area ...........................................................................206 TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................207 E1 .......................................................................................................................208 Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ......................................................208 Modify the label of an E1...................................................................................208 Activate/deactivate the E1 use...........................................................................208 Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ........................................................................209 Modify the management status of LOS alarm .......................................................209 E1 contextual area ...........................................................................................210 Cross Connection.........................................................................................................211 Display the connections of the equipment .................................................................211 Execute a Tributary-Radio connection .......................................................................211 Execute a Radio-Radio connection ............................................................................212 Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..................................................................212 Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) ........................................................213 Delete one or more connections...............................................................................213 Cross Connection contextual area ............................................................................214 Cross connection matrix (info).................................................................................215 SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................217 Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .................................................217 Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................218 Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................218 Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................218 Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................218 Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism ...............219 Verify/modify the management of synchronisation ...........................................................219 Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................219 Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................220 Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................220 Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................220 Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................221 Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH ..........................................221 Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B .............................221 Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1........................................222 Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................222 Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time......................................................................................................222 Verify/modify the management of SSM messages ............................................................223 Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s..................................................223 Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources ......................................................................................................................223 Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ...............224 Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................225

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

7

General tab...........................................................................................................225 T0 tab ..................................................................................................................226 LAN SSM tab .........................................................................................................228 1000Base-T Role tab ..............................................................................................230 Sa Bit tab .............................................................................................................231 E1 Retiming tab.....................................................................................................231 Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................232 Management of synchronisation...............................................................................232 Synchronism sources .............................................................................................232 Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................232 Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................233 Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................233 Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................235 Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................235 Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................236 Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....236 RADIO .............................................................................................................................238 Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................239 Verify/modify the duplex frequency ..........................................................................239 Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on .....................239 Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .............................................240 Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) .........................................240 Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ........................................................240 Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter...............................241 Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation..........................................................241 Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device ..........................................................241 Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile.......................................................................................................................242 Radio Branch contextual area ..................................................................................243 ODU Settings tab .............................................................................................243 ODU Powers tab ..............................................................................................244 MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................245 S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................246 Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................246 Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................246 S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................247 PRBS .........................................................................................................................248 Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure ......................248 Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................248 Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................248 Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure................................................248 Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .....................................................249 PRBS contextual area .............................................................................................250 Radio Loop & Cmd .......................................................................................................251 Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................251 Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................251 Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................252 Execute the test (RF Loop)......................................................................................252 Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply....................................................253 Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter ...........................................................253 Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .................................................253 Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area ...........................................................................255

8

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Test RF Loop (info) ................................................................................................257 Manual Operations.......................................................................................................258 Verify the manual operations status .........................................................................258 Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..............................................................................258 Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .........................................................259 Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply ..................................................259 Activate/deactivate a radio loop ...............................................................................260 Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function............................................................260 Force the management of the switching in reception...................................................260 Force the management of the switching in transmission ..............................................261 Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ................................................................261 Force the use of a synchronism source .....................................................................262 Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..............................................................................262 Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................263 Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................263 Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure .............................................263 Manual Operations contextual area ..........................................................................264 PSU Alarm Config. .......................................................................................................267 Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm ....................................................................267 Enable/disable the PSU alarm ..................................................................................267 PSU Alarm Config. contextual area ...........................................................................268 Radio Switch ...............................................................................................................269 ..............................................................................................270 Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches .................270 Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) ................270 Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) ...........271 Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ........271 Modify the Wait Time parameter ........................................................................271 Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .......................................................................................................272 contextual area ...................................................................273 Radio switch (info) ...........................................................................................274 RMON ........................................................................................................................275 Settings ...............................................................................................................276 Verify the count status of the RMon statistics.......................................................276 Activate the count of the RMon statistics .............................................................276 Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics .........................................................277 Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ............................277 Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics .......................277 Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics .........................................................................................................278 Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics .........................................................................................................279 Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics ........279 Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics...280 Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics ...............................................................................................280 Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ...............................................................................................282 Settings contextual area ...................................................................................283 Ethernet Statistics tab ................................................................................283 Ethernet History tab ...................................................................................284 Ethernet Service Statistics tab .....................................................................285 Ethernet Service History tab ........................................................................286

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

9

RMon standard (info)........................................................................................287 Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................................289 Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ............289 Ethernet Statistics contextual area .....................................................................290 Ethernet Service Statistics ......................................................................................292 Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) .........................................................................................................292 Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area ..........................................................293 Ethernet History ....................................................................................................295 Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).........................295 Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .................................295 Ethernet History contextual area ........................................................................296 Ethernet Service History .........................................................................................298 Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ...................................................................................................298 Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ..298 Ethernet Service History contextual area.............................................................299 ALARM IN/OUT..................................................................................................................301 Alarm Input ................................................................................................................302 Verify the User Input status and configuration ...........................................................302 Modify the name of an User Input ............................................................................302 Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................302 Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input ............................303 Alarm Input contextual area ....................................................................................304 User Input (info)....................................................................................................305 Alarm Output ..............................................................................................................306 Verify the User Output status and configuration .........................................................306 Modify the name of an User Output ..........................................................................306 Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output ............................306 Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output..................................................307 Force the User Output activation..............................................................................307 Remove the forcing of the User Output .....................................................................307 Alarm Output contextual area..................................................................................308 User Output (info) .................................................................................................309

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 310

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 315

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 325

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 331

10

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

MANUAL CONTENT This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the WEB Local Craft Terminal application (release 1.1) present in the equipment AGS-20. The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Terminal page and selecting Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter. In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording: •

WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for AGS-20.

•

WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for AGS-20.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

11

WEB LCT APPLICATION The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation, etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal. WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module installed on the user PC (see Installation). At start-up of WEB LCT, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page that is the application graphical interface (GUI). The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser (see Open/close the WEB LCT page - Fig.1). Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).

Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser) User PC

Equipment (e.g. 172.18.60.33) Controller

WEB LCT application

Supervision port

NE management (HTTP/ HTTPS)

Internet SFTP/SSH

FTP

Browser

WEB LCT page equipment (172.18.60.33)

SSH Server FTP Server

Help file

Help Web Server *

Web Lct Console

* See Installation

12

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

FUNCTIONALITIES

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage: •

The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).

•

The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).

•

The log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equipment configuration (Report & Logger).

•

The Wake Up trap (NMS Wake Up Config.).

•

The equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software Info & Maint.).

•

The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).

•

The forward status of the alarms and their severity (Alarm Severity Config.).

•

The equipment users list (Group/User Management).

•

The equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, FTP, SSH, SFTP, HTTPS) (Security Management).

•

The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation, etc.) (Equipment).

•

The Ethernet Switch main configuration, the TDM tributaries and cross connection matrix (TDM) (Base Band).

•

The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).

•

The radio parameters (Radio).

•

The maintenance parameters (S/N, PRBS, Radio loops, RMon and Radio switch) (Maintenance).

•

The User Input (local and remote) and the User Output (Alarm In/Out).

•

The remote element list (Remote elements list area)

•

The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

13

LIMITS

The following limits must be considered for every single piece of equipment. Remote equipment list

Maximum number of equipment in the list: 100 Maximum number of stations in the list: 30 Remote equipment list (info) User list

Maximum number of groups in the list: 10 Maximum number of users in the list: 10 Users management (info) WEB LCT Session

Maximum number of equipment which can be connected at the same time by means of a single WEB LCT session: 1 Login to equipment

Maximum number of contemporary connections (login): 10 The system supports at most 10 groups, 10 users and 10 login at the same time. As regards the logged users, these are distributed in the following mode: CLI users* connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10. SNMP users** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10. WEB users*** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 4. * CLI user. User of SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System) application. ** SNMP user. User of NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system. *** WEB user. User of WEB LCT application. Area Events

Maximum number of signals in the area Events: 500

14

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

CHARACTERS SET

The GUI accepts and recognizes the character set defined by the ISO/IEC 8859-1. Only exception are the fields relevant to the management of user/groups, which accept and recognize only the characters 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

15

INSTALLATION

WEB LCT

WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any installation on the user PC. At the first equipment switch-on, the user can immediately connect to it via WEB LCT because the application is already present in the controller. Then you can Update the software/firmware of the equipment. Add-ins

As help to equipment WEB LCT for the management of: •

FTP protocol, it is necessary to install the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server (see Equipment.

•

Help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server), it is necessary to install the program WEB Lct Console.

•

SFTP protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

The instructions for the installation of the Web Lct Console (WLC) are reported in the relevant manuals. WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows® environment. WARNING AGS-20 equipment is managed from version 1.2.0 of WLC or later.

Help online

WEB LCT is equipped with a help on-line which can be opened selecting the option [Help] or in WEB LCT page. The help on-line must be installed on one’s PC using the installation file specific for the WEB LCT of the equipment you wish to use.

16

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE Open/close the WEB LCT page Elements of the WEB LCT page Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

17

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser Open more WEB LCT pages Close the WEB LCT page

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more network cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web Lct Console user manual).

When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation). The following procedure requires that: •

The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.

•

The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username/password) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller. The user must be associated to a group for which the protocol HTTP and/or HTTPS is active (see Users management (info). For the first connection or after a Factory Default operation (see Advanced tab) use the credentials Username: admin, Password: admin.

The opening of the WEB LCT page is supported with: •

Internet Explorer 9 or later.

•

Firefox 4.0 or later.

As help for the WEB LCT application in order to manage: •

The FTP Server and Help Web Server, run the program WEB Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later. Alternatively, for the management of FTP, it is possible to use a FTP Server already present on PC (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

The protocol SFTP, it is necessary to install and configure a SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

1. Run a browser. 2. In the address box type the IP Address of the equipment. WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Services Status Config), an error

page could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because troubles have been detected with the security certificates. For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation. To download the SSL certificate see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment. Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept however the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured. The WEB LCT login page opens. 3. Type the name of the user, in the Username box. 4. Type the password, in the Password box. 5. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box. 6. Press Login. If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.2). As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page.

18

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Open more WEB LCT pages It is possible to open: •

More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or different users.

•

Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.

•

More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.

For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.

Close the WEB LCT page Select the [Logout] parameter.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

19

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE

1 - Equipment Menu area 2 - Equipment info area 3 - Users area 4 - Remote elements list area 5 - Contextual area 6 - Equipment status area

Fig.2 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an AGS-20 equipment.

Fig.2 Elements of the WEB LCT page (AGS-20)

3 1

2

4

5

6

20

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Equipment Menu area This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.2). Commands

The commands are subdivided in groups: Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports, Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc. Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parameters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to. For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu). The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expanded, or vice versa). The symbol: identifies an expanded group. identifies a compressed group. It is possible: •

Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing

•

Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing

.

The symbol identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated to it in the context area (see Contextual area). Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed. Press

to hide the area. Press

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

to display the area again.

21

Equipment info area This area shows the equipment general properties. Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type. Equipment ID. Equipment identifier. Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment. Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch: •

Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.

•

Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.

•

Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and at least one C-VLAN component.

Tables

LEFT

TABLE

(see Fig.2). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.

Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed: Branch which the data, present in the relevant row, refer to: •

Tx . Operating status and parameters of the specific branch relevant to transmission (ODU A/ODU B).

•

Rx . Operating status and parameters of the specific branch relevant to reception (ODU A/ODU B).

RF frequency. The wording: •

ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem.

•

Must be Set (Dplx). The specific frequency is not set.

Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx...) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx...). Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange. The wording Tx Off (lines Tx...) indicates that the transmitter is off because of an action of the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of Off or Permanent Off option) or because of the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switch-off of the transmitter (for example, RADIO Vco Fail Alarm). RIGHT TDM:

TABLE.

Channel/modulation and radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet and

Bandwidth & Modulation. Current channel and modulation. TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1). ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to Ethernet tributaries. The parameters are subdivided by radio branch: Tx [1+0] and Rx [1+0]. Respectively transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in not protected configuration. Tx [1+1 HS] and Rx [1+1 HS]. Respectively transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type. Tx [1+1 FD] and Rx [1+1 FD]. Respectively transmission and reception radio branches of a Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type. Tx [2+0 XPIC] and Rx [2+0 XPIC] . Respectively transmission and reception radio branches of a Link with two radio directions in XPIC configuration. The presence of two different Radio Links in 1+0 configuration indicates that the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W. If the Radio module is not equipped or a Radio Link has not been defined yet, the parameters present in the table are not meaningful. The area displays the wording Data Unavailable.

22

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Update data

The information present in the Equipment Info area is updated every 15 seconds (timeout). Press

to force the Equipment Info area updating.

Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed. Press

to hide the area. Press

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

to display the area again.

23

Users area

User Profile parameter [Logout] parameter [Open Far End] parameter [Help] parameter

User Profile parameter Profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page. Options

Admin. The user has Administrator profile. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception. Read/Write. The user has Read/Write profile. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user. Maint. The user has Maintenance profile. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area. Read Only. The user has Read Only profile. The user with this profile can only check the parameters. Login/Logout

At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/ profile entered during the login request. In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login. NMS

If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervisory system considers the connection of a WEB user with Read Only or Maintenance profile a WEB LCT connection in Monitoring mode. While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a WEB user with Read/Write or Administrator profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.

[Logout] parameter This parameter executes the logout of the current user. When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed. To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.

24

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

[Open Far End] parameter This parameter opens the WEB LCT page of remote equipment to contained in the Remote Element Table. Operations

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter. If the remote equipment list contains: •

Only one item of equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equipment is displayed. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed. If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote equipment is unreachable.

•

No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the remote equipment.

•

More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, containing the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list. For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported: •

Station. Station name.

•

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

•

IP Address. IP address.

•

OSI. Parameter not meaningful in this context.

Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment. The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

[Help] parameter This parameter opens the help online of application. The message Unable to contact help support... indicates that the program WEB Lct Console necessary for the management of the Help Web Server has not been started (see Installation).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

25

Remote elements list area In this area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller. Parameters

Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list. STATION (

)

Equipment is subdivided into stations. Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment. At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expanded and vice versa). The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself. The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list. An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the list. EQUIPMENT (

or

)

The symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see column Type). The symbol represents other types of the equipment. The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment . Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address. IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment. Type. Type of equipment: •

Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT application.

•

Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT application, constituting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).

•

Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

•

Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT application.

•

Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node. With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/ ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus, where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.

•

2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.

•

2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.

OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address. Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol. Push-button

GENERAL Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the list. Clear. Reset the remote equipment list Open. Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) STATION Add. Add a station to the list Remove. Remove a station of the list Rename. Rename a station of the list

26

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

ELEMENT Add. Add equipment to the list Remove. Remove equipment from the list Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden. Press

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

See also

Remote equipment list (info)

Add a station to the list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group). 2. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name string. 3. Press OK. The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list relevant to the already existing stations. 4. Press Apply and confirm. An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.

Rename a station of the list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed. 2. Press Rename. 3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name string. 4. Press OK. The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area. 5. Press Apply and confirm.

Remove a station of the list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all pieces of equipment coupled with such

a station.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

27

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed. 2. Press Remove (Station group). The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Add equipment to the list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.

Equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before. 1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled. If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the last selected station. 2. Press Add (Element group). 3. Into the IP Address box, type the IP address of the equipment. The program does not create two pieces of equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even if in different stations). 4. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted: •

Managed By SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT application.

•

Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT application that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment.

•

Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

•

Not Managed. Element not managed by WEB LCT application. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted into an OSI network.

•

2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration. Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.

•

2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration. Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.

5. Press OK. In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment. 6. Press Apply and confirm.

Remove equipment from the list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed. 2. Press Remove (Equipment group). The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

28

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Reset the remote equipment list User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear. The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list area. 2. Press Apply and confirm.

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT page. 2. Press Open. The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens. 3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

29

Remote equipment list (info) Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller. With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish to connect to. For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment. Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station. The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the program WEB LCT is available. When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment), at the connection of such equipment, the WEB LCT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list. In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the WEB LCT window, all the stations that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection request of the application will result in connected/monitor status. The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered to the connection request, until to: •

It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.

•

The user disables the equipment.

•

The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.

More information concerning the WEB LCT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

30

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Contextual area This area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed. Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated in the top part of the contextual area. Push-button

Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual area, effective. Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation, the window is closed and the operation cancelled. The confirmation window displays the option Don’t ask again. Activate the option to avoid the system displays the confirmation request when Apply is selected in any context of WEB LCT page. This setting remains valid until the exit from the current session (logout or page closing). If the Apply push-button is not available: •

It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or the equipment is in connected/monitor status.

•

No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.

•

Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.

Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment. If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active. Help. Open the help on-line. WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context

which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific command. Tabs

For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically changes the content of the contextual area. Parameters

The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified. The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that. Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid: •

Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box. If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because, for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).

•

Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu. When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box. It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communicated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

31

Equipment status area This area shows the functional status of the equipment. Parameters

URGENT . Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box: •

Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity

•

Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.

•

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm. NOT URG. . Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box: •

Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.

•

Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.

•

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm. DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment software/firmware. Colour box: •

Light blue. The update is in progress.

•

Grey. The update is not in progress.

MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box: •

Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).

•

Grey. No manual forcing is active.

Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment. Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed: •

Colour box. Signal type and alarm gravity: •

Green/Status. Status signal.

•

Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.

•

Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.

•

Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.

•

Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.

•

White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.

•

Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.

•

Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.

•

Date/time of the signal detection. If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing. The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of date/time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.

Operations

Verify the active manual operations Verify/modify the manual operation timeout Update data

The information present in the Events area are dynamically updated when an alarm is generated or cleared. Press to force the Events area updating and remove the detected and cleared alarms (box White/Cleared). Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed. Press

32

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

See also

Alarms management (info)

Verify the active manual operations User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select the MAN. OP box. A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment. The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active. The information are not dynamically updated. Press

to update the information.

Verify/modify the manual operation timeout User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.

1. Select the MAN. OP box. The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations. Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic. 2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours). The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout. 3. Press Change and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

33

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE

Opening page

Login Failed! Invalid User o Password!. It means that the typed username and/or password is wrong and/or not present in the equipment user list. The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the WEB user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the WEB user for the execution of the operation. Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users (see Limits). Open page

When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters. Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed: Warning. Invalid or time-out session. You will be redirected to login form The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters cannot be verified/modified. Press Ok to display the WEB LCT page of login to the equipment. Fill the fields Username and Password and press Login to reconnect to the equipment. Access Denied. The selected context is available only to the user with profile Administrator. Warning: You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: . The setting you wish to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout. For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are automatically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. Loading The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment. Updating, Applying Changes The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment. Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action or is not logged to the equipment yet. Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

34

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) Main. It manages the general equipment parameters. Equipment. It manages the radio equipment configuration. Base Band. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration, and the DCN parameters and the TDM traffic. Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism. Radio. It manages the Radio parameters. Maintenance. It manages the maintenance parameters (S/N, PRBS, Radio loops, RMon). Alarm In/Out. It manages the User Input (local and remote) and the User Output.

The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter) necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

35

MAIN

Equipment Properties. It manages the basic configuration of equipment. Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures. Report & Logger. It manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equipment configuration. NMS Wake Up Config. It manages the Wake Up trap. Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default equipment settings. Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration. Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity. Group/User Management. It manages the users list of the equipment. Security Management. It manages the equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, FTP, SSH, SFTP, HTTPS).

36

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Equipment Properties User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Equipment Properties command manages the basic configuration of the equipment. Operations

Verify the basic configuration of the equipment Modify the equipment identifier Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment Execute the equipment software reset Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC Verify the equipment feature Enable a new equipment feature Verify the equipment units GUI

Equipment Properties contextual area

Verify the basic configuration of the equipment User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. The General Info tab displays the basic configuration of the equipment.

Modify the equipment identifier User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. In the Equipment ID field set an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 50 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. In the Agent IP Address box type the new IP address. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Execute the equipment software reset User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation is no traffic affecting.

After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

37

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. Press System Restart and confirm.

Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC User Profile | Admin. WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. Press Align to PC time and confirm. The values present in the System Date/Time area are updated by the values of one’s PC.

Verify the equipment feature User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. Select the Equipment Features tab. The tab displays the equipment feature enabled on demand.

Enable a new equipment feature User Profile | Admin. WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:

•

Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them. If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server and the file (certificate) must be present into a sub-folder of the Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see SSH protocol (info). The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

In order to enable one or more features, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate, represented by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment. For each equipment you wish to enable one or more feature, a specific enabling certificate is required, because there is an univocal Link between each certificate and each specific equipment. 1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. Select the Equipment Features tab. 3. Press Upgrade. 4. In the Cert. file path, type the path/name of the certificate. If the equipment uses the:

38

•

FTP protocol and the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..). Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and the filename of the Shared Folder).

•

SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configuration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

5. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server o r the SSH Server (if not otherwise set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to the IP address of the PC). 6. Press Send. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation: •

Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.

•

Invalid operation for this equipment…. The selected certificate and equipment are not compatible (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).

Verify the equipment units User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties. 2. Select the Equipment Units tab. The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

39

Equipment Properties contextual area The contextual area displays the basic configuration of the equipment. Tabs

General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, IP address, software/firmware version, date/ time. Equipment Features tab. Functionalities enabled for the equipment. Equipment Units tab. Equipment units. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Equipment Properties (command)

General Info tab The tab displays the general equipment properties. Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type. Ethernet Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch: •

Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.

•

Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.

•

Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and at least one C-VLAN component.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier. Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment. IP Address. IP Address of the equipment. MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment. Firmware Version. Identification code and version of the equipment software/firmware present on the memory bench in use. WEB LCT Version. Version of the WEB LCT application for AGS-20 present into the equipment. WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT application for AGS-20 present into the equipment. System Up Time. Days, hours, minutes and seconds since the last restart of the equipment. SYSTEM DATE/TIME Date. Reference date of the equipment. Time. Reference time of the equipment. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system. Push-button

System Restart. Execute the equipment software reset

40

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Align to PC time. Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC See also

Modify the equipment identifier Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment

Equipment Features tab The tab displays the list of the equipment feature enabled on demand. Parameters

FEATURE

NAME

•

Upgrade up to 50 Mbps. Radio profile up to 50 Mb/s*.

•

Upgrade up to 100 Mbps. Radio profile up to 100 Mb/s*.

•

Upgrade up to 200 Mbps. Radio profile up to 200 Mb/s*.

•

Upgrade up to 300 Mbps. Radio profile up to 300 Mb/s*.

•

Upgrade up to 400 Mbps. Radio profile up to 400 Mb/s*.

•

Upgrade up to 500 Mbps. Radio profile up to 500 Mb/s*.

•

Radio Aggregation. Enabling radio configuration IF Radio Sharing Scheme and ETH Radio Sharing Scheme.

•

XPIC. XPIC functionality.

•

Built-in fade margin. Fade Margin functionality (calculation of the Link margin).

•

Eth transport. Enabling of Ethernet transport.

•

OSPF. OSPF protocol.

•

Security package. Equipment security protocols management.

•

Eth OAM enhanced. OAM-FM functionality for Ethernet network.

•

Enhanced Eth monitoring. Monitoring of Enhanced Ethernet.

•

Sync Quality management. Synchronisation quality management.

•

Packet processing (1). Optional Ethernet processing.

* The channelling/modulation available for each radio profile are shown in Tab.1. FEATURE

STATUS

•

Enabled. The functionality is enabled.

•

Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.

Push-button

Upgrade. Enable a new equipment feature Tab.1 Radio profile details (Equipment Features)

Modulation

Channel spacing 7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

40 MHz

56 MHz

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 50 Mbps 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

-

4 QAM

X

X

X

-

-

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

-

-

16 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

32 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

64 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

41

Modulation

Channel spacing 7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

40 MHz

56 MHz

128 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

256 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

512 QAM strong

X

-

-

-

-

512 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

1024 QAM strong

X

-

-

-

-

1024 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

2048 QAM

-

-

-

-

-

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 100 Mbps 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

32 QAM

X

X

X

-

-

64 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

128 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

256 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

512 QAM strong

X

X

-

-

-

512 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

1024 QAM strong

X

-

-

-

-

1024 QAM

X

-

-

-

-

2048 QAM

-

-

-

-

-

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 200 Mbps 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

32 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

128 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

256 QAM

X

X

X

-

-

512 QAM strong

X

X

X

-

-

512 QAM

X

X

X

-

-

1024 QAM strong

X

X

-

-

-

1024 QAM

X

X

-

-

-

2048 QAM

-

X

-

-

-

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 300 Mbps

42

4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Modulation

Channel spacing 7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

40 MHz

56 MHz

32 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

128 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

256 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

512 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

-

512 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

1024 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

-

1024 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

2048 QAM

-

X

X

-

-

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 400 Mbps 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

32 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

128 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

256 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

-

1024 QAM

X

X

X

X

-

2048 QAM

-

X

X

X

-

Radio profile: Upgrade up to 500 Mbps 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

32 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

128 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

256 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

2048 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

X Available option. - Not available option.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

43

Equipment Units tab The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to an unit for which are indicated: Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not physically present into the equipment. Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen. HW Ver. Unit version. Part Number. Part Number of the unit. Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself. Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit. Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm: •

Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.

•

Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording Real Type parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).

•

Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.

•

HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter).

•

SW Mism. The software/firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment).

The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

44

•

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.

•

White. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Performance Monitoring User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures. Operations

Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure Activate one or more PM measures Deactivate one or more PM measures Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure GUI

Performance Monitoring contextual area See also

PM measures available PM measures (info)

Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. The Performances [none selected] window displays the PM measures. The measures are subdivided in groups. The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following: G828 > ODU , checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. RxPwr > ODU , checks the power of the signal at reception. TxPwr > ODU , checks the power of the signal at transmission. ACM > , traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time. 3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure. For every measure is pointed out the status: •

(Stop.). The measure is not on progress.

•

(Run.). The measure is on progress.

Below the measure, more options are pointed out: seconds, blocks, Rlts, etc. depending on the type of selected measure. Every option indicates the measurement unit of the control parameters for which you wish to display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms. This subdivision is necessary because the results of the control parameters cannot be graphically displayed by means of different measurement units. 4. Select the wished measuring unit. The Performances [group / measure / measurement unit] window displays the results of the control parameters, in graphic and table format, and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms. If the measurement has never been activated, the window will result empty. The items in the Performances window are described in Fig.3. It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance window or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

45

Activate one or more PM measures User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. 3. To activate: •

All measures in a group, select the group.

•

Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Start and confirm. The not active measure(s) are started and their status passes from (Stop.) to (Run.).

Deactivate one or more PM measures User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. 3. To deactivate: •

All measures in a group, select the group.

•

Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Stop and confirm. The active measure(s) are stopped and their status passes from (Run.) to (Stop.).

Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. 3. To reset the threshold exceeding alarms of: •

All measures in a group, select the group.

•

Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Clear Alarms and confirm. For the selected measure, active alarms are deactivated except for the unavailability alarms.

Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. 3. To reset the values of the records daily and primary of: •

All measures in a group, select the group.

•

Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Clear Counters and confirm. The values displayed into table are reset.

46

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring. 2. Press Open new performance window. 3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure. 4. Press Commons. If G828 > ODU measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters: •

General area. Threshold levels of the UAS parameter: •

N Ses Set UAS(P) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES) over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply and confirm.

•

N Ses Reset UAS(Q) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds without SES) over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply and confirm.

The threshold (expressed as percentage of the errored blocks) over which it is declared a SES is 30% and is not changeable. Press •

to compress the area. Press

to expand the area.

15M Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

24H Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

15M Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

24H Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

15M Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute period) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

24H Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Sep. To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

If RxPwr > ODU measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters: •

15M Rlts Thresholds area. 15M Rlts alarms threshold: •

Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

24H Rlts Thresholds area. 24H Rlts alarms threshold:

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

47

•

Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

Rlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the received power: •

Rlt 1 (dBm), Rlt 2 (dBm), Rlt 3 (dBm), Rlt 4 (dBm), Rlt 5 (dBm). Respectively the first, the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -100dBm and 20dBm.

Press

to compress an area. Press

to expand the area.

If TxPwr > ODU measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters: •

15M Tlts Thresholds area. 15M Tlts alarms threshold: •

Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

24H Tlts Thresholds area. 24H Tlts alarms threshold: •

Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

•

Tlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the transmitted power: •

Tlt 1 (dBm), Tlt 2 (dBm), Tlt 3 (dBm), Tlt 4 (dBm). Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -40dBm and 35dBm, press Apply and confirm.

Press

to compress an area. Press

to expand the area.

If ACM > measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters: •

15M Thresholds area. Alarms threshold: •

15M Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the counter has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.

To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. •

24H Thresholds area. Alarms threshold: •

24H Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.

To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. = 4QAMS, 4QAM, 16QAMS, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 512QAMS, 512QAM, 1024QAMS or 1024QAM or 2048QAM (see Tab.5). Press

48

to compress an area. Press

to expand the area.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Performance Monitoring contextual area WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. The contextual area manage the PM measures. Push-button

Open new performance window. Open the Performances window which allows: Manage the PM measures (activation, deactivation, threshold setting). Display the activation status of the PM measures Display the results of the measures in graphic and table format. Display the status of the threshold exceeding alarms. It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance window or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself. See also

Performance Monitoring (command) Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure Activate one or more PM measures Deactivate one or more PM measures Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure PM measures available PM measures (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

49

Performances window Fig.3 displays the elements of the Performances window. Fig.3 Performances window

1 2 3

4

6

5

(1)

Title bar. When the window is opened, the title bar displays Performances [none selected]. When you select an option which allows displaying the results of a measure ( see note 3), Performances [Selected group / Selected measure / Selected measurement unit] will be displayed, for example Performances [G828 / ODU A / seconds]. Push-button . Compress the window. . Expand the window. . Expand the window to the size of the Browser page. . Restore the original size of the window. . Close the window.

(2)

Push-buttons bar: Start. Activate one or more PM measures. Stop. Deactivate one or more PM measures. Clear Alarms. Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures. Clear Counters. Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures stored into the equipment and displayed into the window. Refresh. Update the data. Commons. Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure. Pushbutton meaningful only if one group is selected. Open New Window. Open a new Performances window.

50

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Help. Open the help on-line. The push-buttons Start, Stop, Clear Alarms and Clear Counters, if a group is selected, execute their action for all the measures present in the group. Otherwise, if one measure or one option below the measure is selected, they execute their action only for the selected measure. (3)

List of the PM measures. The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded. Selecting one measure, the options pointing out the measurement units of the parameters associated to the measure are displayed. This subdivision is necessary because it is not possible to graphically represent the results of the control parameters by means of different measurement units. Selecting one measurement unit in the right part of the window (see note 4), the result of the control parameters and the threshold exceeding alarms are displayed. If the measure has never been activated, the graph and the table will be empty. The symbol: identifies an expanded group or measure. identifies a compressed group or measure. identifies a measuring unit. To every measure, the status is displayed: (Stop.). The measure is not on progress. (Run.). The measure is on progress. The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following: G828 > ODU , checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units: •

seconds. Seconds: ES, SES, SEP, UAS.

•

blocks. Blocks: BBE.

RxPwr > ODU , checks the power of the signal at reception. The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units: •

Rlts. Seconds: Rlts1, Rlts2, Rlts3, Rlts4, Rlts5.

•

TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.

TxPwr > ODU , checks the power of the signal at transmission. The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units: •

Tlts. Seconds: Tlts1, Tlts2, Tlts3, Tlts4.

•

TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.

ACM > , traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time. The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following counters:

Press (4)

•

seconds. Counters relevant to the ACM profiles.

•

UpDownShift. Counters Unavailable, DownShift and UpShift. to hide the list of measures. Press

to display the list again.

Graphical representation of the measure results. This area displays, in graphical format, the results of the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit. Every bar represents the result of the measure of one parameter in a given observation period (daily or primary record). The position of the bar on the x-axis indicates the daily or primary record which it is referred to: •

C.D. Current daily record (24 hours). The X100 suffix indicates that the value must be multiplied by 100 to obtain the real measured value.

•

L. D. Preceding daily record. The displayed value must be multiplied by 100 to obtain the real measured value.

•

Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).

•

15 Min. ÷ 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

Moreover, for every record the relevant status is displayed: (ML), (MF), (IN), (LO), (RE). The description of every single status is reported in the following note. If the status indication is not present, the record is not available, because the measure was not active during the considered observation period.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

51

The colour of the bar indicates the control parameter that corresponds to the value. The key of the parameters and their colours is always pointed out above the graph. The displayed control parameters changes according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note 3). The position on the y-axis indicates the value achieved by the parameter during the specific observation period (record). The measurement unit on the y-axis changes depending on the type of parameter represented in the graph. Moreover the y-scale dynamically changes depending on the entity of the represented values. The results relevant to a given parameter can be hidden selecting the parameter label located in the top part of the area (for example ). To display the parameter results again, select the label again. (5)

Table representation of the measure results. This area displays, in table format, the results of the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit. For every parameter, the result of the measure is pointed out relevant to a given observation period (daily or primary record): •

Type. According to the selected measure this field indicates: •

G828, RxPwr and TxPwr measures: Control parameters (see PM measures available).

•

ACM measure: Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile (see PM measures available). For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. Besides one counter per modulation, the following counters are foreseen: •

Unavailable. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, for which the count has not been possible because the current ACM profile was not connected to the radio.

•

DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.

•

UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.

Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the counters. Such results have been subdivided according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note 3). •

Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).

•

Last Day. Preceding daily record.

•

Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).

•

15 Min. ÷ 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status of the records (Count. Status): •

Meaningless (ML) (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors.

•

Meaningful (MF) (green). The record has been completely acquired and it detected some performance errors. If one or more alarms are active (see note 6) means that the counter(s) have exceeded their threshold value.

•

Incomplete (IN) (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.

•

•

Lost (LO) (red). The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted (RE) (red). The record has been lost after a reset of the equipment. When the equipment has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status.

52

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

(6)

---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.

Status of the threshold exceeding alarms and configuration parameters. These fields change according to the selected measure: G828 measures •

15M . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24H . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

•

UAS. Unavailability alarm.

RxPwr measure •

15M . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24H . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

•

Rlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the received power actually set. These parameters can be configured by the user.

TxPwr measure •

15M . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24H . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

•

Tlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These parameters can be configured by the user.

ACM measure •

15M . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

•

24H . Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

The colour of the alarm boxes represents the alarm status and severity: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

53

PM measures available

G828 > ODU RxPwr > ODU TxPwr > ODU ACM >

G828 > ODU WARNING The G828 > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0)

or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration. The G828 > ODU measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters: BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES. ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks. SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > 30% or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception. SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES. UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

RxPwr > ODU WARNING The RxPwr > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0)

or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration. The RxPwr > ODU measure checks the power of signal at reception. The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters: TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels. The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

TxPwr > ODU WARNING The TxPwr > ODU B is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC, 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration.

54

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

The TxPwr > ODU measure checks the power of signal at transmission. The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters: TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours) Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels. The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

ACM > WARNING Measure available and meaningful if the adaptive modulation is active.

The ACM > traces the trend of the ACM profiles (receiver) in the time. The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and further counters (Unavailable, UpShift and DownShift): 4QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 4QAM Str has been active. 4QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 4QAM has been active. 16QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 16QAM Str has been active. 16QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 16QAM has been active. 32QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM ACM 32QAM has been active. 64QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 64QAM has been active. 128QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 128QAM has been active. 256QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 256QAM has been active. 512QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 512QAM Str has been active. 51QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 512QAM. 1024QAM Str. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 1024QAM Str has been active. 1024QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 1024QAM has been active. 2048QAM. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the profile ACM 2048QAM has been active. Unavailable. Number of seconds, within the specific observation period, during which the count has not been possible because the current ACM profile was not connected to the radio. DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one. UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one. WARNING The representation in graphical and table format of the counter results (see Fig.3) uses a counter

resolution with granularity of 1 second. If the modulation change has lasted for less than 1 second, it will not be indicated by the modulation counters (4QAM Str, 4QAM, etc.) but by the counter DownShift or Upshift. The availability of the modulations changes according to the radio configuration (see Tab.5).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

55

PM measures (info) A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of specific parameters. Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can be changed). The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm. The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms. The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (eg. G.828, etc.). The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed by the user. When it has been activated a PM measure, the equipment starts the storing of the values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period). If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure. The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records). The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated). For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time 11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.4000.00. When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records relevant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment. For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day). The preceding records are overwritten. When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record. If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure. For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be stored. If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started. The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records. See also

Performance Monitoring (command) Performance Monitoring contextual area Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure Activate one or more PM measures Deactivate one or more PM measures Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures

56

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure PM measures available PM measures (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

57

Report & Logger User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Report & Logger command manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equipment configuration. With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller (alarm history). With log of the operations we mean the list of the operations executed by all the users who can connect to the equipment. The list is stored in the equipment controller. Operations

Save the log of the equipment alarms Delete the log of the equipment alarms Save the log of the operations executed by the users Delete the log of the operations executed by the users Save the equipment configuration GUI

Report & Logger contextual area See also

Alarms management (info)

Save the log of the equipment alarms User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger. 2. Press Alarm Log. In the Alarm Log window are displayed: •

•

Equipment Info. General parameters: •

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

•

Equipment Type. Equipment type.

•

Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.

Current Alarm Log and History Alarm Log. Respectively list of the current alarms and history alarms. Every single record identifies an alarm with the following information: •

•

Severity. Alarm severity. •

Status. Alarm status.

•

Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm respectively with the Warning, Minor, Major or Critical severity.

Status. Alarm status: •

On. Alarm active.

•

Off. Alarm inactive (detected/cleared alarm). Meaningful only for alarm history.

•

Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the alarm. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

•

Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the alarm.

3. Press Download Report. 4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save. The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Alarm Log window.

58

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Delete the log of the equipment alarms User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger 2. Press Reset Alarm Logger and confirm. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

Save the log of the operations executed by the users User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger. 2. Press Command Log. In the Command Log window are displayed: •

•

Equipment Info. General parameters: •

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

•

Equipment Type. Equipment type.

•

Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.

Current Command Log. Operations list. Every record identifies an operation for which are reported: •

Performer. Type of user who has performed the operation: •

web. User of WEB LCT application.

•

snmp. User of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system (NMS5UX user).

•

cli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via serial line.

•

remoteCli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet.

•

Action. Action performed by the user.

•

Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.

•

Value Set. Set value.

•

User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.

•

Source Address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the operation.

•

Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/ time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

The empty box indicates that the information is not available, because not meaningful for the relevant type of operation. 3. Press Download Report. 4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save. The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Command Log window.

Delete the log of the operations executed by the users User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger 2. Press Reset Command Logger and confirm. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

59

Save the equipment configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger. 2. Press Inventory Report. In the Inventory Report window are displayed: •

•

Equip Info. General parameters: •

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

•

Equipment Type. Equipment type.

•

Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.

HW Inventory, SW Inventory, SW list, etc. Equipment parameters. The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters present in each group is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.

3. Press Download Report. 4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save. The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Inventory Report window.

60

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Report & Logger contextual area The contextual area allows to save the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equipment configuration. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Reset Alarm Logger. Delete the log of the equipment alarms Reset Command Logger. Delete the log of the operations executed by the users Alarm Log. Save the log of the equipment alarms Command Log. Save the log of the operations executed by the users Inventory Report. Save the equipment configuration See also

Report & Logger (command) Alarms management (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

61

NMS Wake Up Config. User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The NMS Wake Up Config. command manages the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality). Operations

Verify the Wake Up functionality status Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality Disable the Wake Up functionality GUI

NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area See also

Wake Up functionality (info)

Verify the Wake Up functionality status User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config. The NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending parameters.

Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and them modify them.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config. 2. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box. 3. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled, in the Timeout (Minutes) box. Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it. 4. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box. The setting of the parameter is optional. 5. Select the Enable option. 6. Press Apply and confirm.

62

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Disable the Wake Up functionality User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config. 2. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

63

NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality. Parameter

Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is: •

Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

•

Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed. Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it. NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UXB or NMS5LX does not use this information. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

NMS Wake Up Config. (command) Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality Disable the Wake Up functionality Wake Up functionality (info)

64

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Wake Up functionality (info) The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap). Auto Discovery

This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX. The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant documentation. This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The implementation of the Wake Up functionality is the following. WEB LCT

Via WEB LCT application, it is possible: •

Define the IP address of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must be sent to (NMS IP Address option) is installed.

•

Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is automatically disabled (Timeout option). If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.

•

Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap. To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable option. To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the NMS IP Address option (value 0.0.0.0).

When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically disabled. If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off). See also

NMS Wake Up Config. (command) NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area Verify the Wake Up functionality status Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality Disable the Wake Up functionality

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

65

Software Info & Maint. User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default equipment settings. Operations

Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment Update the software/firmware of the equipment Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller Restore Factory Default of the equipment Execute the equipment software reset GUI

Software Info & Maint contextual area See also

Equipment software/firmware (info) Factory Default of the equipment (info)

Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint. The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware and the WEB LCT version present into the equipment.

Update the software/firmware of the equipment User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:

•

Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them. If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server and the file for the update must be present into a sub-folder of the Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see SSH protocol (info). The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value). This operation cannot be executed when the update is already in progress (Download Status parameter Downloading value). The software/firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions. 1.

Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Press Upgrade. 3. In the box Download file path, type the path/name of the file you wish to use for update.

66

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

The file must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the display of WEB LCT is running). If the equipment uses the: •

FTP protocol and the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..). Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and the filename of the Shared Folder).

•

SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configuration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).

4. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server or the SSH Server (if not differently set at the configuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC). 5. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option: •

Forced, if you are updating the software/firmware of main controller of the equipment.

•

Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the software/firmware of peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code).

6. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the software/firmware that has been updated. 7. Press Start and confirm. Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be forwarded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal. The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment. If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the update: the wording Interrupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the bench whose software/firmware you are updating. If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the bench whose software/firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires some minutes: •

Downloading. The operation is running. The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the software/firmware update, can be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation. During the updating, the system deletes the software/firmware present into the bench memory and it updates the software/firmware of the equipment one component at a time. If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated components. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the bench will be in Not Loaded status). In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of the software/firmware.

•

Complete. The update operation is ended. The Software Version box shows the new software/firmware version.

Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.

Memory benches cannot be switched during the software/firmware update (Download Status parameter Downloading value) and when the software/firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench Status parameter - Not Loaded value). 1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint. 2. Press Bench Switch and confirm. The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status and vice versa.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

67

Restore Factory Default of the equipment User Profile | Admin. WARNING The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss

of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default values. 1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Activate the Factory Default check-box. 4. Press Apply and confirm. At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is displayed. 5. Press OK to close the window. 6. Press Restart and confirm. The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of the equipment (info).

Execute the equipment software reset User Profile | Admin. WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

Operation is no traffic affecting. 1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Press Restart and confirm.

68

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Software Info & Maint contextual area The contextual area displays the equipment software/firmware. Tabs

Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment software/firmware. Advanced tab. Factory default. Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Software Info & Maint. (command)

Equipment Firmware tab The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment software/firmware. Table

FIRST

TABLE

The table displays the version and the status of the equipment software/firmware: Software Version. File name and version of the equipment software/firmware respectively present on the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column). Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column): •

Running. It is on progress the software/firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.

•

Loaded. The software/firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress (StandBy).

•

Not Loaded. The software/firmware is not present into the memory bench.

Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the software/firmware respectively present on memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):

SECOND

•

---. Update is not in progress.

•

Downloading. It is on progress the updating relevant to the memory bench.

•

Interrupted. The update has been interrupted.

•

Complete. The update operation is ended.

TABLE

The table displays the list of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment software/firmware. Every row corresponds to a software/firmware element for which is pointed out in the column: Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file). Software. Name which usually identifies the type of component: •

FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided with a version of the memory benches.

•

FW_appl. Application code.

•

Conf, Prog, Init or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.

•

WEB LCT. WEB Local Craft Terminal application.

Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller. For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

69

Release Bench 1. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller. Release Bench 2. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller. Push-button

Upgrade. Update the software/firmware of the equipment. Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller. See also

Equipment software/firmware (info)

Advanced tab WARNING Tab available only to users with Administrator profile.

The tab displays the parameters to restore the factory default of the equipment. Parameters

Factory default. Box to Restore Factory Default of the equipment. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Restart. Execute the equipment software reset. See also

Factory Default of the equipment (info)

70

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Equipment software/firmware (info) The software/firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the entire equipment and WEB LCT application. The software/firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status. Each bench can contain one software/firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment. It is possible to update the software/firmware of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value). Here below the impact of every equipment download/restart operation on the traffic is reported. Operation Restart software

Traffic No traffic affecting

Bench Switch

Traffic affecting

Power Off/On

Traffic affecting

Download sw/fw

No traffic affecting

See also

Software Info & Maint. (command) Software Info & Maint contextual area

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

71

Factory Default of the equipment (info) Through the WEB LCT application, the Factory Default settings of equipment can be restored (see Restore Factory Default of the equipment). At the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration will be applied. All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment list, etc.). In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: admin - Password: admin. The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.2. These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU. The equipment keeps always in memory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected to the IDU, the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to equipment configured with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default addresses. Tab.2 Factory Default Parameter

IP Address

NetMask

ODU

IP Address Agent IP Address

172.20.254.14

255.255.0.0

Low

172.20.255.15

255.255.0.0

High

Default Gateway

255.255.255.255*

-

Low

255.255.255.255*

-

High

* Value equivalent to null. See also

Software Info & Maint. (command) Software Info & Maint contextual area

72

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Backup/Restore Config. User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration. Operations

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration) Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) GUI

Backup/Restore Config. contextual area See also

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:

•

Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them. If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see SSH protocol (info)). The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config. 2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server or the SSH Server (if not differently set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC). Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which has made the request. 3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file with bak extension. It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present in the file will be overwritten. If the equipment uses the: •

FTP protocol and the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..). Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and the filename of the Shared Folder).

•

SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configuration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).

4. Press Backup and confirm. A window shows the progress of the operation. To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm. A message displays the result of the operation.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

73

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:

•

Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them. If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server and the file with the configuration must be present into a subfolder of the Shared Folder set during the configuration of FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see SSH protocol (info). The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config. 2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server or the SSH Server (if not differently set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC). Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which has made the request. 3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration. If the equipment uses the: •

FTP protocol and the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..). Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and the filename of the Shared Folder).

•

SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configuration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).

4. Press Restore and confirm. A window shows the progress of the operation. To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm. At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.

Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Ftp/Sftp contextual area), check out that:

•

Protocol FTP. The program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active, otherwise start them. If you use an FTP Server, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).

•

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see SSH protocol (info). The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config. The Reverte parameter shows the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last restore operation. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system. The wording --- shows that the file is not available. 2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server or the SSH Server (if not differently set at the configuration of Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).

74

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which has made the request. 3. Press Revert and confirm. A window shows the progress of the operation. To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm. At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

75

Backup/Restore Config. contextual area The contextual area displays the parameters to save and restore the whole equipment configuration. Parameters

Backup file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to save the whole equipment configuration to. Restore file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to use for the restore of the previously saved configuration. FTP Server IP Addr. IP address of the FTP Server or of the SSH Server used for the file transfer. The address 0.0.0.0 indicates that the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which has made the request. Reverte. Date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last restore operation. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system. The wording --- shows that the file is not available. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration) Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) See also

Backup/Restore Config. (command) Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

76

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Backup

The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration). The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the user needs. Restore

In any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore). Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps it available until the successive restore operation. Revert

In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration). In this way, two backup versions will be always available for equipment: one executed by the user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation. See also

Backup/Restore Config. (command) Backup/Restore Config. contextual area Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration) Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

77

Alarm Severity Config. User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity. Operations

Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms Enable/disable an alarm Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm Change the severity of an alarm GUI

Alarm Severity Config. contextual area See also

Alarms management (info)

Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config. The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.

Enable/disable an alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config. 2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm. 3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting: •

Disable, to disable the alarm.

•

Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the severity to be assigned to the alarm

4. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed next to the name of the changed alarm. 5. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm

(see Enable/disable an alarm). 1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config. 2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.

78

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting: •

Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.

•

Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external to the equipment (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

4. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed next to the name of the changed alarm. 5. Press Apply and confirm.

Change the severity of an alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config. 2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm. 3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modifying the alarm severity, automatically enables it. 4. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed next to the name of the changed alarm. 5. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

79

Alarm Severity Config. contextual area The contextual area displays the alarms configuration. Alarms are subdivided into groups. When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column). To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol next to the name of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if compress it is expanded and vice versa). When a group is expanded, for every alarm is displayed the characteristics. The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration. Parameters

Group/Alarm. Alarm name. A colour box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity: •

White box with red X. Alarm disabled.

•

Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.

•

Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.

•

Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.

•

Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.

•

Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.

The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name shows that at least one characteristic of the alarm has been changed. Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if it is enabled, the relevant severity: •

Disabled. Alarm disabled.

•

Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.

•

Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.

•

Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version present into the equipment controller.

Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap: •

Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.

•

Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management system is disabled (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

•

---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm or Change the severity of an alarm See also

Alarm Severity Config. (command) Alarms management (info)

80

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Alarms management (info) The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any component that composes it. The signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction but a status change, an operation in progress or an operating indication are defined status signals. The term event defines every signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm. A maximum of 500 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new event will overwrite the oldest event. Displaying alarms

The list of the current alarms is indicates in the Equipment status area. Enabling/disabling alarms

The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs. Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred. On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected, this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next item), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history alarms. WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm is independent for each alarm and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed for each alarm of each equipment.

Enabling/disabling traps

The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by the equipment to a possible external management system, for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX. The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to his own needs. Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program. On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system, which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms. WARNING The enabling/disabling of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed for each alarm of each equipment.

Alarm severity

Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the local management program has an associated severity which determinates the importance of the alarm. This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes. Alarms log

With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller (alarm history). WEB LCT allows to Save the log of the equipment alarms and to Delete the log of the equipment alarms. See also

Alarm Severity Config. (command) Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

81

Group/User Management

Groups. It manages the user groups. Users. It manages the users (users list of the equipment). Permanent Login. It manages the IP address of Permanent Login. Logged Users. It manages the users connected to equipment.

82

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Groups User Profile | Admin.

The Groups command manages the user groups of the equipment. Operations

Verify the user groups Add a user group Modify a user group Delete a user group GUI

Groups contextual area See also

Users management (info) HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) SNMP protocol (info) FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info)

Verify the user groups User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups. The Groups contextual area displays the list of the user groups currently stored in the equipment.

Add a user group User Profile | Admin. WARNING It is possible to set a maximum of 10 groups (see Limits).

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups. 2. Press Add Group. 3. Into the Name box, type the group name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z). The parameter is Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters. It is not possible to assign the same name to two different groups present into the same list. The parameter can not be changed later. 4. Set the profile you wish to assign to the user who will belong to the group in the Profile box: •

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception. Moreover, every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides being a WEB user, is even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is automatically enabled by the system to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System).

•

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

83

user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user. •

Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.

•

Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

5. Define the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to the group (Allowed Protocols parameter): •

HTTP. HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.

•

HTTPS. HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL. It is a variation of HTTP protocol and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.

•

SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol which allows monitoring and controlling the network devices. If you activate this protocol, select the relevant version: •

SNMPv1. First version.

•

SNMPv2c. Second version.

•

SNMPv3. Third version.

•

FTP. File Transfer Protocol. Protocol for the file transfer.

•

SFTP. SSH File Transfer Protocol. Protocol for the secure file transfer.

•

SSH. Secure SHell. Protocol for the secure and encrypted access.

The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. At least one protocol must be activated. 6. Press OK and confirm. The new group is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a user group User Profile | Admin. WARNING The Name and CLI parameter cannot be modified.

A group with at least one associated user cannot be modified. First delete the users and then modify the group. 1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups. 2. To modify the profile of the users associated to a group, select the relevant Profile box and then the option: •

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.

•

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.

•

Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.

•

Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

The parameter of the last group with profile Administrator cannot be modified. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. To change the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to a group, select the relevant box: •

HTTP. Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol). The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

•

HTTPS. Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL). The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

84

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

•

SNMP. SNMP protocol. Select the option: •

Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.

•

SNMPv1. Protocol SNMPv1 enabled.

•

SNMPv2c. Protocol SNMPv2c enabled.

•

SNMPv3. Protocol SNMPv3 enabled.

FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

•

SFTP. SSH File Transfer Protocol: protocol for the secure file transfer. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

•

SSH. Secure SHell: protocol for the secure and encrypted access. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

At least one protocol must be active. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Delete a user group User Profile | Admin. WARNING A group with at least one associated user cannot be deleted. First delete the users and then the

group. This operation is not available if the default group Admin is selected. 1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups. 2. Select the group. 3. Press Remove Group and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

85

Groups contextual area The contextual area displays the list of the users groups of the equipment. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to a group for which are indicated: Name. Group name Profile. Profile of the users associated to the group: •

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.

•

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.

•

Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.

•

Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

CLI. Permission of the user to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System). The active box ( ) indicates that the WEB user is even a CLI user, the inactive box indicates that the WEB user is not a CLI User too. The parameter is read-only because the setting is automatically made by WEB LCT, according to the profile defined during the group creation: only the users belonging to groups with profile Admin have the functionality CLI enabled. HTTP. Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol): protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. HTTPS. Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL): variation of HTTP protocol and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. SNMP. Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol): protocol which allows monitoring and controlling the network devices. Option: •

Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.

•

SNMPv1. First version.

•

SNMPv2c. Second version.

•

SNMPv3. Third version.

FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. SFTP. Protocol (SSH File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the secure file transfer. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. SSH. Protocol (Secure SHell): protocol for the secure and encrypted access. The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.

86

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Add Group. Add a user group. Remove Group. Delete a user group. Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. See also

Groups (command) Users management (info) HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) SNMP protocol (info) FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

87

HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transfer hypertext pages within WEB. All HTTP traffic takes place via the TCP/IP protocol on port 80 of PC. HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) is a variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. All HTTPS traffic takes place on port 443 of PC. In web browsers, URI which refers to this technology is named https. For more information about RFC 2818 specification (HTTP Over TLS). AGS-20

Equipment can operate with HTTP protocol or HTTPS protocol. Protocols are implemented in exclusive mode in such a way that, when a user connects via HTTPS, HTTP requests will be re-addressed to HTTPS and vice versa. The use of the protocol HTTP and/or HTTPS at equipment level can be enabled in any moment (see Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol). If the operator enables both the HTTP protocol and the HTTPS protocol, the system will automatically use the more secure protocol (HTTPS). The utilization of a protocol during a WEB LCT session depends even on the enabling state of the user, who has opened the session, in relation to the use of this protocol. The protocols enabled for one user depend on the group associated to the user (see Group/User Management). Example. If the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of HTTPS protocol but only HTTP, this user can open the WEB LCT session only in HTTP mode even if the HTTPS protocol is enabled in the Services Status Config contextual area. In the same way, if the user XY is associated to a group enabled to the use of HTTPS and HTTP protocol, but the HTTPS protocol is disabled in the Services Status Config contextual area, the user XY can open the WEB LCT session in HTTP mode. As general rule, for the correct use of one protocol, it is necessary that the protocol is enabled to the use and that the user who opens the WEB LCT session is associated to a group enabled to the use of the same protocol. First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses HTTP protocol. The protocol (HTTP or HTTPS) used to open the WEB CT page is defined at level of NMS system. HTTPS (AGS-20) - SSL certificate

Enabling HTTPS protocol is possible only if you have a digital certificate SSL for WEB Server. Main aim of this certificate is to authenticate the server (for example, AGS-20 equipment) at the customers’ (e.g., user PC where the WEB LCT page relevant to equipment is opened). SSL foresees that, on connection, the server provides its certificate; if the certificate is signed by a recognised certification Authority (Trusted certificates), then a secure communication can be started. From the physical point of view, the certificate is a file containing the information relevant to the issuing authority, to the subject of certificate and additional information indicating the use which the certificate has been released for. WARNING AGS-20 equipment is not provided with SSL certificates when it is put in field. Moreover, the restore of Factory Default deletes possible certificates already loaded on equipment.

How to get a SSL Trusted certificate

You can get a SSL certificate requiring it to a recognised certification authority (Certification Authority - CA), that is a public authority enable to the univocal emission of certificates. The Certification Authority ensures the identity of the owner of the certificate signing the public and private keys by its own private key. The procedure to request the certificate can change from CA to CA depending on the required information and on the procedure for the generation and the communication of the pair of key (see documentation of specific CA).

88

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Generally, all CA’s will require to provide a CSR (Certificate Signing Request), that is a request containing the data which shall be certificated. To generate the CSR of an equipment see Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment. The generation of CSR includes also the generation of a Private Key, which will not be included in CSR itself will be used only to sign the request of certificate. The information to include in CSR changes depending on the context for which you request the certification. CA will define which information is useful. In any case the name/address of server (Common Name), which you require the certificate for, will be required. For the generation of SSL certificates relevant to AGS-20 equipment, the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use the certificate (for more information, see Certificate license - AGS-20 hereinafter in the chapter). With IP address we mean the address entered in the URL of the browser to open the page WEB LCT. As result of the certification request, CA will provide the file relevant to final SSL certificate. This file must be loaded on the equipment (see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment). SSL UnTrusted certificates - AGS-20

It is possible to create, and load on the equipment, certificates self-generated by the user (e.g. via OpenSSL). The self-signed certificates (UnTrusted certificates) are not generally considered trustworthy by browsers. They are useful for verification purpose, but the standard use of them does not ensure the security of server-client connection. To ensure the security within an equipment network, it is necessary to use certificates signed by a certification authority (Trusted certificates). Certificate license - AGS-20

The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are specific with respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released. During the authentication of a server (equipment) at a client (user PC), one of the first executed check consists in comparing the value of the field Common Name present in the certificate with the URL of the web page you are opening. The equipment WEB LCT page is opened at URL //. This involves that the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the equipment IP address. So, if you wish to migrate a whole network of AGS-20 equipment from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol, it is necessary to have a SSL certificate for every equipment where the relevant Common Name corresponds to the equipment IP address. Certificate expiry - AGS-20

Generally, SSL certificates have a quite long expiry. When the certificates on the equipment expiry, they must be replaced with new valid certificates by means of the procedures Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment and Download the SSL certificate in an equipment. How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20

In summary, the operations to perform in order to implement the use of the protocol HTTPS on AGS-20 equipment are the following: • •

Open the WEB LCT page of the equipment for which you wish to generate the request of the certificate (CSR). Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment. During this operation, set the IP address of the equipment indicated in the URL of the WEB page to Common Name. The system, besides generating the CSR, will send the private RSA key to the equipment.

•

Copy the CSR and paste it to a text file.

•

Send the CST to the chosen CA.

•

When CA will send the file containing the SSL certificate signed, load it to the equipment (see Download the SSL certificate in an equipment).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

89

•

Verify that the group, which the user used to open the HTTPS session with the equipment is associated to, is enabled. Otherwise, it is necessary to enabled him (see Groups contextual area/Users contextual area).

•

Verify that the protocol HTTPS at equipment level is enabled, otherwise it is necessary to enable it (see Services Status Config contextual area).

SSL and TLS protocol

The protocols SSL (Secure Socket Layer) and TLS (Transport Layer Security) are encryption protocols which allow a secure communication in TCP/IP networks. As indicated at the beginning of the chapter, the protocol HTTPS is a variation of HTTP which uses the SSL level for the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. In order to do this, the protocols SSL/TLS use three main functionalities: •

Authentication. The authentication of the identity in the connections can be executed using the encryption with public key (e.g., RSA, DSS etc.).

•

Security. In order to ensure a secure connection between two users involved in a communication, the data are protected using encryption algorithms with symmetric key (e.g., DES, RC4, etc.).

•

Reliability. The transport level includes a check on the integrity of the message based on a proper MAC (Message Authentication Code) which uses secure hash functions (e.g., SHA, MD5 etc.). In this way, you can verify that the data transmitted between client and server have not been altered during the transmission.

SSL and TLS protocol - AGS-20

AGS-20 equipment uses the protocol TLS version 1. The user can choose, from the list of CipherSuite, the combination of encryption algorithms supported by the client, sorted according his preferences. In detail, the list of CipherSuite indicates: •

The algorithm for the Key Exchange.

•

The CipherSpec containing the data encryption algorithm (Cipher) with the possible implementation characteristics and the algorithm for the Message Authentication Code (Hash).

AGS-20 equipment manages the following CipherSuite. CipherSuite

Key Exchange

Cipher

Hash

RSA-3DES-SHA

RSA

3DES

SHA

RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA

RSA

AES-128-CBC

SHA

RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA

RSA

AES-256-CBC

SHA

See also

Groups (command) Services Status Config (command) SSL/HTTP Secure (command)

90

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

SNMP protocol (info) The SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3. The main differences between SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 are the management of message security and the control of the accesses. SNMPv1/v2c

The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified. SNMPv3

The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection of the messages and the control of the access. In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the packets. In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm. The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenticated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code. Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet containing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication. This allows defining if allowing the user an access: •

Without authentication (noAuthNoPriv).

•

With authentication (AuthNoPriv).

•

With authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).

For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications. AGS-20

The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol and with SNMPv3 protocol. In order to preserve the security, SNMPv3 protocol must be used. The use of the protocol SNMPv1/v2c and/or SNMPv3 can be enabled at equipment level in any moment (see Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol). The use of a protocol during a WEB LCT session, however, depends on the enabling state of the use of this protocol by the user who has opened the session. The protocols enabled for a user depend on the group associated to the user (see Backup/Restore Config.). Example. If the user XY is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol SNMPv3, a WEB LCT session opened by the user XY will accept and process only SNMPv3 packets; the received SNMPv1/v2c packets will be dropped. In analogous way, if the user YZ is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol SNMPv2c, a WEB LCT session opened by the user YZ will accept and process only SNMPv1/v2c packets. As general rule, for the correct use of one protocol, it is necessary that the protocol is enabled to the use and that the user who opens the WEB LCT session is associated to a group enabled to the use of the same protocol. First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses SNMPv1/v2c protocol. Tab.3 displays, for every SNMP version, the security levels (noAuthNoPriv, AuthNoPriv, AuthPriv) supported by the equipment and the description of the provided security mechanisms.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

91

Tab.3 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 Security model

Security level

SNMPv1/v2c

noAuthNoPriv

Community String

SNMPv3

noAuthNoPriv

AuthNoPriv

AuthPriv

Authentication Encryption

Description

Notes

No

Community-based authentication: the passwords are transmitted not encrypted and displayed in the traces

This security level is automatically assigned to a user by the system when the user is associated, during the creation procedure, to a group using the protocol SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c*.

Username

No

Authentication based on user name

This security level is automatically assigned to a user by the system when the user is associated, during the creation procedure, to a group using the protocol SNMPv3*.

MD5 or SHA

No

Authentication based on algo- This security level is automatically assigned to a user by the system when, rithms HMAC-MD5 or HMACduring the creation procedure: SHA

MD5 or SHA

DES 56

Authentication based on algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMACSHA and encryption with algorithm CBC-DES (DES-56) in addition to authentication

•

The user is associated to a group using the protocol SNMPv3*.

•

The authentication algorithm/password is defined to the user*.

This security level is automatically assigned to a user by the system when, during the creation procedure: •

The user is associated to a group using the protocol SNMPv3*.

•

The authentication algorithm/password and the encryption algorithm/ password are defined to the user*.

* See Add a user. See also

Groups (command) Users (command) Services Status Config (command)

92

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

FTP/SFTP protocol (info) FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are two protocols for the file transfer based on TCP. Main difference between FTP and SFTP is the management of security. The FTP protocol does not foresee the data encryption, while the SFTP protocol is based on SSH protocol for the data encryption and the secure file transfer. AGS-20

The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP protocol. The use of the protocol FTP and/or SFTP can be enabled in any moment (see Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol). If the operator enables the protocols FTP and SFTP at the same time, the system will automatically use the most secure protocols (SFTP). The utilization of a protocol during a WEB LCT session depends even on the enabling state of the user, who has opened the session, in relation to the use of this protocol. The protocols enabled for one user depend on the group associated to the user (see Group/User Management). Example. If the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of the protocol SFTP, even if the protocol SFTP is enabled in the Ftp/Sftp contextual area, the file transfer between PC and equipment during a WEB LCT session opened by XY will take place via FTP. In the same way, if the user XY is associated to a group not enabled to the use of the protocol SFTP, but the protocol SFTP is not enabled in the context area Ftp/Sftp, the file transfer between PC and equipment during a WEB LCT session opened by XY will take place via FTP. As general rule, for the correct use of one protocol, it is necessary that the protocol is enabled to the use and that the user who opens the WEB LCT session is associated to a group enabled to the use of the same protocol. When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore Config.), the equipment uses the FTP protocol. The management of the protocol for the file transfer (FTP or SFTP) between NMS and equipment is defined at NMS level and, for the current system version, is always FTP. FTP protocol- AGS-20

The default FTP credentials of the equipment are: user Anonymous, no password. The FTP credentials can be changed at one’s wish (see Modify the FTP access credentials). The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used. The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the FTP protocol. The instructions for the installation and use of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported in the relevant manuals. To manage the FTP protocol, as tool auxiliary to WEB LCT application, it is necessary to install and run one of the following programs: •

Web Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later. When the program is started, the FTP server provided with the program itself is automatically started. The server does not perform any check on the credentials. For the download operations, it is sufficient to enter the complete path where the file resides. At start-up of WLC, if a FTP Server is already active, the FTP server available with the program is not started. This condition is signalled by a message.

•

Standard FTP Server (e.g., free FTP Server FileZilla). If you use your own FTP Server, it must be installed and configured if not already present on the PC. The configuration consists in defining the users and the path (Shared Folder) used later for the file transfer.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

93

USERS. For a correct management of the data transfer, the credential used to access to WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server. For this reason, it is suggested to configure, for the FTP Server, the users present in the equipment user list with whom the download/upload operations are executed. PATH. Define the path of Shared Folder for the file transfer. The path will be used to save the files in the upload operations and shall be the path (even partial) where are present the files for the download operations. It is suggested not to save the files in C:\, but to create a sub-folder and set it for the file saving (e.g. C:\ftp or C:\backup). This allows saving the backup files without being Administrator users (some Windows versions require to be Administrator user to save the file in C:\). SFTP protocol - AGS-20

The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the user to access to the WEB LCT page. The SFTP credentials can be changed at one’s wish (see Modify the SFTP access credentials. For a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server. The change of credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used. As help for the WEB LCT application in order to manage the protocol SFTP, it is necessary to install and configure a SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server). See also

Groups (command) Ftp/Sftp (command)

94

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Installation and configuration of SSH server

1. Install the free SSH server freeSSHd. a. Execute the guided installation of freeSSHd.exe. b. When asked Do you want to run FreeSSHd as a system service? press No. 2. Verify that, during the program installation, a service has not been installed in Windows. a. Open the Windows Task Manager window. b. Select the Services tab. c. Press Services. d. Verify that the list does not contain the option FreeSSHDServices. e. If present, select it, open the Properties window and set the parameter Startup type -> Manual. 3. Configure the SSH server. a. Open the freeSSHd settings window. b. Select the SSH tab. c. Activate the Start SSH server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply. d. Select the Telnet tab. e. Deactivate the Start Telnet server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply. f. Select the Authentication tab and verify the setting of the following parameters: •

Password authentication -> Allowed.

•

Public key authentication -> Allowed.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply. g. Select the Encryption box and verify the setting of the parameter: •

Allowed ciphers -> Any.

If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply. h. Select the Tunneling tab and verify the setting of the following parameters: •

Allow local port forwarding -> inactive box.

•

Allow remote port forwarding -> inactive box.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply. i.

Select the SFTP tab, in the SFTP home path set the path of the home directory for the file transfer and press Apply. The file path must be in C:\. It is suggested NOT to save the files in C:\, but to create a subfolder in C and set it to save the files (for instance, C:\ftps or C:\backup). This allows saving the backup files without being Administrator user (in some version of Windows, in order to save the files in C:\, it is necessary to be Administrator user).

j.

Select the Automatic updates tab and verify the setting of the following parameters: •

Check for new version on startup -> inactive box.

•

Update without asking me for confirmation -> inactive box.

•

Show info messages from freeSSHd.com -> inactive box.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply. k. Select the Logging tab, in the Log file box set the path/filename to save the log file and press Apply. l.

Select the Host restrictions tab and verify the setting of the parameter: •

Refuse these IP addresses -> active box.

If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply. m. Select the Users tab, press Add and create the SFTP users setting the following characteristics and press OK. •

Login -> User name

•

Authorization -> Password stored as SHA1 hash.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

95

•

Password/Password (again) -> Access code.

•

User can use -> Shell, SFTP.

WARNING It is suggested to create the users presents in the user list of the equipment because the equipment uses, as default SFTP credentials, the same of the user used to access the WEB LCT page.

4. Restart the SSH server and verify its status. a. Open the freeSSHd settings window. b. Select the Server status tab and verify that: •

The Telnet server is not running (Telnet server is not running).

•

the SSH server is running (SSH server is running).

WARNING After the configuration of SSH server, if the one or more parameters must be changed, to make the change operative, restart the server selecting the Unload command present in the contextual menu of the FreeSSHD Service application.

See also

FTP/SFTP protocol (info)

96

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

SSH protocol (info) SSH (Secure SHell) protocol allows implementing secure connections between two system, using a client/ server architecture. SSH protocol is available in two versions: version 1 (SSH1) and version 2 (SSH2). Documents defining the protocol can be found at http://www.ietf.org. AGS-20

The equipment can operate with protocol SSH1 and/or SSH2. Besides the selection of the protocol version, it is possible to define the authentication and encryption algorithms managed by the equipment. These configurations can be executed by CLI (application SM-OS): refer to CLI for more information. By means of WEB LCT, the use of the protocol SSH can be enabled/disabled (see Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol). For the correct use of the protocol SSH, it is necessary that the user, who opens the WEB LCT session, is associated to a group enabled to the use of the protocol itself (see Group/User Management). When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore Config.), the SSH protocol is disabled (SSH2 version). See also

Groups (command) Services Status Config (command)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

97

Users User Profile | Admin.

The Users command manages the users (WEB and SNMP) of the equipment. Operations

Verify the user list Add a user Modify a user Delete a user GUI

Users contextual area See also

Groups (command) Users management (info) SNMP protocol (info)

Verify the user list User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users. The Users contextual area displays the list of the users (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equipment.

Add a user User Profile | Admin. WARNING It is possible to set a maximum of 10 users (see Limits).

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users. 2. Select Add User. 3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. The parameter can not be changed later. 4. Press Change at the side of the Password parameter. 5. Into the New Password and Confirm New Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z) and press OK. The fields are Case Sensitive. Pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters. 6. Set the group, to which you wish to associate the user, in the Group box. The user will inherit the group characteristics: profile and use of the protocols HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP and SSH. The parameter can not be changed later. 7. In the Timeout box, set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. If you wish:

98

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an infinity period (session timeout disabled), set the value 0.

•

The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), set a value between 1 and 3600 sec. (1h). With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

8. Only if the user you are creating belongs to a group for which the SNMP3 protocol has been set, execute the following steps: a. Set, in the Auth Protocol box, the authentication protocol (algorithm) associated to the user: •

None. No authentication algorithm.

•

MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

•

SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash code (HMAC).

The parameter can not be changed later. b. Press Change at the side of the Auth Key parameter. c. Set, in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, the authentication password associated to the user (alphanumeric string of at least 4 characters and at most 31 characters. The characters accepted and recognised are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z) and press OK. The fields are Case Sensitive. Pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters. d. Set, in the Priv Protocol box, the cypher protocol (algorithm) associated to the user: •

None. No cypher algorithm.

•

DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

•

AES. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) cypher algorithm.

The parameter can not be changed later. e. Press Change at the side of the Priv Key parameter. f. Set, in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, the cypher password associated to the user (alphanumeric string of at least 4 characters and at most 31 characters. The characters accepted and recognised are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z) and press OK. The fields are Case Sensitive. Pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters. 9. .Press OK and confirm. The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a user User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users. 2. Select the user and press Modify User or double click on the user. 3. Execute the changing. The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user. The parameter User, Group, Auth Protocol and Priv Protocol can NOT be changed. To change them, it is necessary to delete the user and create him again with the wished characteristics. The fields for the setting of the password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters. 4. Press OK and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

99

Delete a user User Profile | Admin. WARNING The operation is not available if the selected user is the current user or the last user with Administrator profile.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users. 2. Select the user. 3. Press Remove User and confirm.

100

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Users contextual area The contextual area displays the user list (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equipment. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to a user for which are indicated: User. User name. Group. Group which the user is associated to. Profile. User profile: •

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.

•

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.

•

Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.

•

Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

Auth. Authentication protocol (algorithm) associated to the user: •

None. No authentication algorithm.

•

MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

•

SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash code (HMAC).

Parameter meaningful only for users associated to a group with protocol SNMPv3 enabled. Priv. Cypher protocol (algorithm) associated to the user: •

None. No cypher algorithm.

•

DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

•

AES. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) cypher algorithm.

Parameter meaningful only for users associated to a group with protocol SNMPv3 enabled. Timeout. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user: •

O. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.

•

. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page has been closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout). Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Add User. Add a user. Remove User. Delete a user Modify User. Modify a user. See also

Users (command) Users management (info) SNMP protocol (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

101

Users management (info)

Users list

The user list is a list of the users who can connect and require to login to the equipment by the WEB LCT application (WEB user) or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX program (SNMP user). If an user is not present in the list stored in the equipment controller, that user cannot connect and/or login to the that equipment. Users are subdivided into groups (for details, see successive paragraphs). Before creating an user, it is necessary to create the group which the user must be associated to. One group can contain more users, but one specific user can belong to only one group. A maximum of 10 groups and 10 users can be created in the equipment user list. At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group and a default user are available. Then, through WEB LCT application, new users and groups can be created, modified and deleted. The management of the user list can be performed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system. Groups

The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which it is possible to define a profile and the enabling to the use of HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP e SSH protocols. The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is associated to that group. The characteristics of a group are: •

Name of the group. The name of the group must be unique within an user list.

•

Profile which will be automatically assigned to the users associated to the group:

The name of the group, once assigned, cannot be changed. •

Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception. Moreover, every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides being a WEB user, is even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is automatically enabled by the system to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System).

•

•

Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.

•

Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area.

•

Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

Protocols which will be available to the users assigned to the group: •

Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol), used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.

•

Protocol HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL): variation of HTTP protocol and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.

•

Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), which allows monitoring and controlling the network device. The user can activate the use of the first version (SNMPv1), the second version (SNMPv2c) or the third version (SNMPv3) of the protocol.

•

Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol), for the file transfer based on TCP.

•

Protocol SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the secure file transfer.

•

Protocol SSH (Secure SHell Protocol): protocol for the secure and encrypted access.

More options can be enabled at the same time. At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group is available with the following characteristics: Name: Admin. Profile: Administrator.

102

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Enabled protocols: HTTP, FTP and SNMPv1. The default group can be changed but not deleted. Via WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user groups and only one user with Administrator profile can Add a user group, Modify a user group or Delete a user group. Users

The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which a profile and the enabling to the use of the HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP and SSH protocols can be defined. The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is associated to that group. The characteristics of an user are: •

Name/Password. Name and access password, which allow the program recognizing the user as authorized. The same user can open more WEB LCT page relevant to different equipment. The name of an user must be unique within an user list. The name of an user, once assigned, cannot be changed.

•

Group which the user is associated to and from which the user inherits the profile and the enabling to the use of HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, FTP, SFTP and SSH protocols. Every user belonging to a group with profile Administrator, besides being a WEB user, is even a CLI user because a user with profile Administrator is automatically enabled by the system to access to the equipment even by the application SM-OS SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System).

•

Timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. It is possible to: •

Disable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be preserved for an indefinite period of time.

•

Enable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will be automatically terminated once the set time period is reached. With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session for which the relevant WEB LCT page has been closed, but the disconnection from the equipment has not been performed (user logout).

At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default user is available with the following characteristics: User: admin Password: admin Group: Admin. (default group - see characteristics in previous paragraph). Profile: Administrator. Timeout: 300 sec. WARNING At the first access, it is suggested to immediately change the password of the default

user in order to limit the risk of intrusion via this account. The default user can be modified or deleted. The only condition is that there must be at least one other user with Administrator profile in the user list. Through WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user list and, only an user with Administrator profile, Add a user, Modify a user or Delete a user. NMS5UX user

If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system, it is necessary to create the user used by the supervision system for the connection to the equipment. This user must be associated to a group with profile Administrator and all the protocols enabled. More information about the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system is reported in the relevant documentation. See also

Groups (command) Users (command) Groups contextual area Users contextual area Equipment

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

103

Permanent Login User Profile | Admin.

The Permanent Login command manages the remote users who have the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does not need for a login password. A maximum of 2 remote users can be set. Operations

Verify the IP address of Permanent Login Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login GUI

Permanent Login contextual area See also

Users management (info)

Verify the IP address of Permanent Login User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login. The Permanent Login contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possibility to be connected to the equipment.

Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login. 2. To set/modify the IP address of the machine relevant the: •

First remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 1 box.

•

Second remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 2 box.

Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

104

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Permanent Login contextual area The contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). Parameters

Manager IP Address 1. IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user. Manager IP Address 2. IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user. Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Permanent Login (command) Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login Users management (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

105

Logged Users User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Logged Users command manages the users connected to the equipment. Operations

Verify the users connected to the equipment Force the logout of a user GUI

Logged Users contextual area See also

Users management (info)

Verify the users connected to the equipment User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users. The Logged Users contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the command is selected. Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.

Force the logout of a user User Profile | Admin. WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users. 2. Select the wished user. 3. Press Force Logout and confirm.

106

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Logged Users contextual area The contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the command is selected. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to a user for which are indicated: User. User name. The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote user who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). Profile. User profile (see User Profile parameter). Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session: •

0 s. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.

•

s. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant page has been closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout). Login Type. User type: •

WEB. User of the WEB LCT application.

•

SNMP. SNMP user or user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system.

•

CLI. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet or serial line.

IP Address. Machine IP address. With the wording machine, it is intended the PC/server/workstation on which the application used by the user is actually running. Parameter not meaningful for the user of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via serial line. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Force Logout. Force the logout of a user Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Logged Users (command) Users management (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

107

Security Management

Services Status Config. It manages the equipment communication protocols (SNMP, HTTP, Telnet, SSH, HTTPS). SSL/HTTP Secure. It manages the configuration of the protocol SSL and the SSL certificate (generation of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment). Clients. It manages the FTP and SFTP protocols.

108

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Services Status Config User Profile | Admin.

The Services Status Config command manages the equipment communication protocols (services used by the management program to access to the equipment). Operations

Verify the operating of the communication protocols Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol GUI

Services Status Config contextual area See also

HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) SNMP protocol (info) FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info)

Verify the operating of the communication protocols User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Security Management > Services Status Config. The Services Status Config contextual area shows the name, the administrative status and the operating status of the services on the equipment.

Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Security Management > Services Status Config. The parameter Admin State indicates the current administrative status of the protocols: •

Disable. The protocol is disabled.

•

Enable. The protocol is enabled.

2. To modify a parameter, select the new value in correspondence of the wished protocol. The protocol HTTPS can be enabled if: •

there is, in the user list, at least one user enabled to use it.

•

the relevant SSL certificate is present in the equipment (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

109

Services Status Config contextual area The contextual area shows the equipment communication protocols. Table

Every table row corresponds to a protocol for which are indicated: Service Name. Name of the protocol (service): •

SNMPv1v2c. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol first and second version: protocol which allows monitoring and controlling the network devices.

•

SNMPv3. SNMP protocol third version.

•

Telnet. TCP-based Client-server network protocol which provides the user with sessions of remote login.

•

SSH. SSH (Secure SHell) protocol: protocol for the secure and encrypted access.

•

HTTP. HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) protocol: protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.

•

HTTPS. HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) protocol: variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol, SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data.

Admin Status. Administrative state (enabling) of the protocol: •

Enable. The protocol is enabled.

•

Disable. The protocol is disabled.

Operative Status. Operating status of the protocol: •

Running. The protocol is operating.

•

Stopped. The protocol is not operating (disabling of the protocol or malfunction.)

Push-buttons

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. See also

Services Status Config (command) Enable/disable the operating of a communication protocol HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) SNMP protocol (info) FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info)

110

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

SSL/HTTP Secure User Profile | Admin.

The command SSL/HTTP Secure manages the configuration of the protocol SSL and the SSL certificate (generation of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment). Operations

Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment Download the SSL certificate in an equipment GUI

SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area See also

HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)

Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Security Management > SSL/HTTP Secure. The SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area displays the configuration of the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) protocol.

Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Security Management > SSL/HTTP Secure. The area HTTP Secure Ciphersuite lists the CipherSuite managed by the equipment: •

RSA-3DES-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algorithm: 3DES. Algorithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA.

•

RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algorithm: AES-128-CBC. Algorithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA

•

RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Data encryption algorithm: AES-256-CBC. Algorithm for Message Authentication Code: SHA.

2. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the wished options.

3. Press Apply and confirm. 4. In order to make the change effective, it is necessary to disable and re-enable the protocol HTTPS: a. Select Security Management > Services Status Config. b. In the Admin State box of the HTTPS option, select the Disable value. c. Press Apply and confirm. d. In the Admin State box of the HTTPS option, select the Enable value. e. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

111

Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment User Profile | Admin. WARNING This operation is included in the procedure for the implementation of the protocol HTTP for AGS20 equipment. Before executing it, read How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20 in HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).

1. Select Security Management > SSL/HTTP Secure. 2. Press Generate Certificate Signing Request. 3. Set, in the box RSA Key Size, the length of RSA key: 512 or 1024. 4. Set, in the box Common Name, the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use the certificate. With IP address we mean the address entered in the URL of the browser to open the page WEB LCT. 5. Press Generate. The text area displays the CSR. Moreover, the key associated to the certificate request is communicated to the equipment. 6. Select and copy the content of the area into a text file. The file shall be sent to the Certificate Authority to obtain the relevant SSL certificate. 7. Press Cancel to close the Generate Certificate Signing Request. window.

Download the SSL certificate in an equipment User Profile | Admin. WARNING Operation available only if you have the file of to the SSL certificate relevant to the equipment

you are connected to. The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are specific with respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released. For the AGS-20 equipment, the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use the certificate. This operation is included in the procedure for the implementation of the protocol HTTP for AGS-20 equipment. Before executing it, read How to implement the protocol HTTPS - AGS-20 in HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info). 1. Select Security Management > SSL/HTTP Secure. 2. Press Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Authority. 3. Open, in a text editor, the file relevant to the SSL certificate obtained by the Certificate Authority relevant to the equipment you are connected to and copy it. 4. Paste the SSL certificate to the text area of the window Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Authority. 5. Press Send. The new certificate is now in use. The message Invalid certificate indicates that the operation has not been executed because the certification is corrupted or because the key present on the equipment does not match that of the certificate.

112

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

SSL/HTTP Secure contextual area The contextual area shows the configuration of SSL protocol and allows managing the SSL certificate (generation of CSR and loading of the certificate in the equipment). Parameters

HTTP SECURE CIPHERSUITE SSL Version. Version of the protocol in use: •

TLS-1. Protocol Transport Layer Security version 1.

Read only parameter. List of CipherSuite managed by the equipment: •

RSA-3DES-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algorithm of data encryption: 3DES. Algorithm for the Message Authentication Code: SHA.

•

RSA-WITH-AES-128-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algorithm of data encryption: AES-128-CBC. Algorithm for the Message Authentication Code: SHA

•

RSA-WITH-AES-256-CBC-SHA. Algorithm for the key exchange: RSA. Algorithm of data encryption: AES-256-CBC. Algorithm for the Message Authentication Code: SHA.

The active box ( is not used.

) means that the CipherSuite is in use, the inactive box means that it

SSL DIGITAL CERTIFICATE MANAGEMENT Generate Certificate Signing Request. Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment Enter Certificate Signed By Certification Authority. Download the SSL certificate in an equipment Push-buttons

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. See also

SSL/HTTP Secure (command) HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info) Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

113

Clients

Ftp/Sftp. It manages the FTP and SFTP protocols.

114

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Ftp/Sftp User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ftp/Sftp manages the FTP and SFTP protocols on the equipment. Operations

Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol Modify the FTP access credentials Modify the SFTP access credentials GUI

Ftp/Sftp contextual area See also

FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info)

Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Security Management > Clients > Ftp/Sftp. The Ftp/Sftp contextual area displays the operating status of the protocols FTP and SFTP.

Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING If the operator enables the protocols FTP and SFTP at the same time, the system will automatically use the most secure protocols (SFTP).

1. Select Security Management > Clients > Ftp/Sftp. 2. To ENABLE the protocol: •

FTP, set, into the Ftp area, the Enable value (Service Status parameter).

•

SFTP, set, into the Sftp area, the Enable value (Service Status parameter).

3. To DISABLE the protocol: •

FTP, set, into the Ftp area, the Disable value (Service Status parameter).

•

SFTP, set, into the Sftp area, the Disable value (Service Status parameter).

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the FTP access credentials User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of FTP protocol is active and the equipment operates as SSH Client.

The default FTP credentials are: user Anonymous, no password. The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page is re-opened, the default credentials are used.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

115

1. Select Security Management > Clients > Ftp/Sftp. 2. In Ftp area, press Reset Credentials. 3. Type, in the box User, the new user name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters). 4. Type, in the box Password, the new access code (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters). 5. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the SFTP access credentials User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of SFTP protocol is active and the equipment op-

erates as SSH Client. The default SFTP credentials are the same used by user to access to WEB LCT page. The change of SFTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page is re-opened, the default credentials are used. 1. Select Security Management > Clients > Ftp/Sftp. 2. In Sftp area, press Reset Credentials. 3. Type, in the box User, the new user name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters). 4. Type, in the box Password, the new access code (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters). 5. Press Apply and confirm.

116

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Ftp/Sftp contextual area The contextual area displays the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols. Parameters

FTP Service Status. Operative status of the FTP protocol: •

Enable. The protocol is enabled.

•

Disable. The protocol is disabled.

SFTP Service Status. Operative status of the SFTP protocol: •

Enable. The protocol is enabled.

•

Disable. The protocol is disabled.

Push-buttons

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. FTP Reset Credentials. Modify the FTP access credentials SFTP Reset Credentials. Modify the SFTP access credentials See also

Ftp/Sftp (command) FTP/SFTP protocol (info) SSH protocol (info) Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

117

EQUIPMENT WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).

Radio Configurator. It displays the radio configuration present on the equipment. BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and Link identification number. General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters. Xpic. It manages the XPIC function.

118

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Configurator User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).

The command Radio Configurator displays the radio configuration present on the equipment. Operations

Verify the Radio Link configuration Create a Radio Link Modify a Radio Link Delete a Radio Link Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link GUI

Radio Configurator contextual area See also

Radio Link (info)

Verify the Radio Link configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > Radio Configurator. The Radio Configurator contextual area shows the Radio Link(s) defined for the equipment.

Create a Radio Link User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation not available if all the Radio ports have been already used for other Links.

If you wish to configure the equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration - 2x(1+0) E-W - it is necessary to create two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0. If you wish to configure the equipment with two Radio Links connected to the same site - 2x(1+0) - you have to create two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 and, then, aggregate them. After the creation of one Radio Link Radio in configuration 2+0 XPIC, it is necessary to aggregate the relevant Radio ports. 1. Select Equipment > Radio Configurator. 2. Select Create New Link and press Next>. 3. Set, in the Select Link Type box, the Radio Link type you want to create: •

1+0. Radio Link in unprotected configuration.

•

1+1 HS. Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type.

•

1+1 FD. Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.

•

2x0 XPIC. Radio Link realized with two isofrequential transceivers which transmit on orthogonal polarizations at the same time.

The available values change according to the equipment type (see Tab.4). 4. Set, in the Link Name box, the name of the Link (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters). By default, the name Link is suggested.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

119

5. In the table Available ODU, select the wished ODU’s according to the set type of Radio Link. In detail, for the Radio Link in configuration: •

1+0, select ODU A or ODU B (if available).

•

1+1 HS, 1+1 FD or 2x0 XPIC, select ODU A and ODU B.

In any moment, it is possible to come back to step 2 pressing Radio Configurator. 2. Select Modify a Link and press Next>. 3. Set, in the Current Link box the Radio Link you want to modify. 4. Set, in the New Link Type box, the new type of the Radio Link. Depending on the configuration of the Radio Link selected in the previous step, different values will be available as indicated here below. Current Link

New Link Type

1+0

1+1 HS, 1+1 FD, 2+0 XPIC

1+1 HS

1+0, 1+1 FD

1+1 FD

1+0, 1+1 HS

2x0 XPIC

1+0

The wording No Configurations means that the Radio Link type cannot be changed. 5. In the table Available ODU, select the wished ODU’s depending on the new type of Radio Link: •

1+0, select ODU A or ODU B (if available).

•

1+1 HS, 1+1 FD or 2x0 XPIC, select ODU A and ODU B.

In any moment, you can go back to step 2 pressing Radio Configurator. 2. Select Delete a Link and press Next>. 3. Select (

), in the Select Link to Delete table, the Radio Link you want to delete.

4. Press Done.

120

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

The Radio Link is removed from the table Current Radio Configuration.

Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only for Radio Links in configuration 2+0 XPIC or 2x(1+0).

In these configurations, the ports of the Radio Link have to be aggregated in such a way to compose a single Bundle routed into the same direction. 1. Select Equipment > Radio Configurator. 2. Select Manage Aggregation and press Next>. For each radio branch (column Aggregated - values ODU A, ODU B) the Radio port currently associated to the radio channel is indicated (column Current Aggregator - values Port ODU A, Port ODU B). The column New Aggregator indicates if a new aggregation can be done. The option: •

No Aggregators Available, indicates that no aggregation can be done to the considered port.

•

Select New Aggregator, indicates that it is possible to do aggregation to the considered port.

3. Select the box with the value Select New Aggregator and choose the port you wish to aggregate. 4. Press Done. In the table Current Radio Configuration, the column ODU Ports indicates the port where the Radio Bundle terminates. The aggregation between ports will be automatically removed by the system if the Radio Link is modified or deleted. In any moment the operator can remove the aggregation executing again this procedure and selecting, in step 3, the port associated to the ODU (Aggregated: ODU B -> New Aggregator: Port ODU B).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

121

Radio Configurator contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4).

The contextual area shows the radio configuration present on the equipment. Parameters

CURRENT RADIO CONFIGURATION Link#. Number of the Radio Link. Link Name. Name of the Radio Link. Link Type. Type of the Radio Link: •

1+0. Radio Link in unprotected configuration.

•

1+1 HS. Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type.

•

1+1 FD. Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.

•

2x0 XPIC. Radio Link realized by two isofrequential transceivers which transmit on orthogonal polarization at the same time.

ODU(s). Outdoor units on the equipment: ODU A, ODU B. ODU Ports. Radio port which every single ODU is connected to. If two ODU’s are connected to the same Radio Port, it means that the Radio channels are aggregated into a Radio Bundle. Select Operation. Operations for the management of the Radio Links: Create New Link. Create a Radio Link Modify a Link. Modify a Radio Link Delete a Link. Delete a Radio Link Manage Aggregation. Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link An option in grey is not available in the specific context. Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Prev. During an operation, it allows going back to the previous step. Next. During an operation, it allows going to the next step. See also

Radio Configurator (command) Radio Link (info)

122

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Link (info) AGS-20 equipment manages different types of Radio Links. With Radio Link we mean a connection between one or more ports (IF) of the indoor unit (AGS-20) and one or more outdoor units (ODU) which are considered one or more integral parts of AGS-20 network equipment. A Radio Link can have different configurations: 1+0, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 2+0 XPIC. Two Radio Links in configuration 1+0 can be oriented to two different sites (configuration 2x(1+0) E-W) or to a single site (configuration 2x(1+0). In the latter case, the Ethernet traffic of the two Radio Links has to be necessarily aggregated. Even in case of configuration 2+0 XPIC, the Ethernet traffic has to be necessarily aggregated. In all the configurations, the ODU’s are always connected to the IDU’s through a dedicated channel available via IF cables. The management programs access to the ODU’s only through the IDU controller, this means that IDU and ODU are always seen as a single network element. The creation of the Radio Link must be executed by the operator via WEB LCT (see Create a Radio Link). Once created, a Radio Link can be changed or deleted (see Modify a Radio Link and Delete a Radio Link). Tab.4 shows, for each configuration of the Radio Link (native or system), the types of AGS-20 for which it is available. 1+0

The Radio Link in configuration 1+0 uses a single ODU. In this configuration, the radio offers no protection against the hardware failures. 1+1 HSB - 1+1 FD

The Radio Link in configuration 1+1 uses two ODU’s. In this configuration, the radio module offers protection against the hardware failures. The protection logic supports two protection architectures: •

Frequency Diversity (FD). Two parallel Tx-Rx connections using two different frequencies. Both Tx branches are working; in Rx the best of the received signals is used.

•

Hot Stand-By (HB). Two parallel Tx-Rx connections. One Tx is operating while the second Tx is "mute"; in Rx the best of the received signals is used.

2x(1+0)

The equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) uses two ODU’s connected to the same site. In this configuration, two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 have to be defined, which use two different frequencies. The two Radio Links have to be necessarily aggregated by means of the functionality Physical Layer Aggregation in such a way to create a single Bundle routed into the same direction (see Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link). The radio parameters can be independent and the TDM traffic can be managed separately on both the radio links. 2x(1+0) E-W

The equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) E-W uses two ODU’s connected with two different sites. In this configuration, two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 must be defined. The radio signal is forwarded in two different directions named, by convention, East and West. The radio parameters (modulation, bandwidth, channel frequency) are completely independent and the traffic (TDM and Ethernet) is managed separately on both the radio links.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

123

2+0 XPIC

The Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC uses two ODU’s connected to the same site which transmit on two polarizations of one antenna using the same frequency (functionality XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation). In this configuration, one Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC. The two ODU’s have to be necessarily aggregated by means of the functionality Physical Layer Aggregation in such a way to create a single Bundle routed into the same direction (see Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link). Tab.4 Radio Link Configuration Radio configuration

Radio module

Outdoor unit

1+0

1+1 HS

1+1 FD

2x(1+0) **

2x(1+0) E-W ***

2+0 XPIC

AGS-20 Switch

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

AGS-20 Single-IF

x

ODU A

x

-

-

-

-

-

AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1

x

ODU A

x

-

-

-

-

-

x

ODU A ODU B

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

ODU A ODU B

x

x

x

x

x

x

Equipment type *

AGS-20 Dual-IF AGS-20 Dual-IF 16xE1

* See Verify the equipment units ** See Create a Radio Link. The configuration must be realized creating two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0 and then aggregating their Radio ports. *** See Create a Radio Link. The configuration must be realized creating two different Radio Links in configuration 1+0. x Option available. - Option not available. See also

Radio Configurator (command) Radio Configurator contextual area

124

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

BW & Mod./Link ID User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the BW & Mod./ Link ID command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more BW & Mod./Link ID commands, one per every single Radio Link. The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and Link identification number. Operations

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation Modify the reference band Modify the reference modulation Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) Verify/modify the number of E1’s permanently allocated Verify/modify the Link identification number GUI

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

Modify the reference band User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The Bandwidth parameter indicates the current reference band. 2. To change the parameter, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm. The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Features tab).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

125

Modify the reference modulation User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The Reference Modulation parameter indicates the current reference modulation. 2. To change the parameter, select the wished value. The availability of values is shown in Tab.5. 3. Press Apply and confirm. The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Features tab). Tab.5 Availability modulations

Modulations

Channel spacing 7 MHz

14 MHz

28 MHz

40 MHz

56 MHz

Radio Link configuration: 1+0, 1+1 FD, 1+1 HS 4 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

32 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

128 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

256 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

512 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM strong

X

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM

X

X

X

X

X

2048 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

Radio Link configuration: 2+0 XPIC 4 QAM strong

-

X

X

X

X

4 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

16 QAM strong

-

X

X

X

X

16 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

32 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

64 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

128 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

256 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

512 QAM strong

-

X

X

X

X

512 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM strong

-

X

X

X

X

1024 QAM

-

X

X

X

X

2048 QAM

-

-

-

-

-

X Supported value. - Not supported value.

126

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.

•

Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The parameter Profile Management indicates the type of management used by the adaptive modulation for the profiles. The selection of the value influences the set of values which can be set for the modulation thresholds (see Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

High Gain. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high system gain. The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong to 256QAM, 512QAM Strong and 1024QAM Strong.

•

High Throughput. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high throughput. The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong a 256QAM, 512QAM, 1024QAM and 2048QAM.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The Upper Profile and Lower Profile parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the ACM profile (code and modulation). 2. To change the parameters Upper Profile and Lower Profile, select the value relevant to the wished modulation. WARNING The value changes according to the setting of the Profile Management parameter and of the radio configuration (see Tab.5).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the number of E1’s permanently allocated User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

If equipment reached by supervision by radio connection (management) are present in the network, it is necessary to execute the operation of E1 change first on the from remote equipment

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

127

furthest from management (last element), then on the second to last, on the third to last and so on, until the equipment directly connected to management. This procedure is necessary not to loose the traffic. 1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams). For the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, there are two parameters: one for the E1 channels of ODU A (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU A]) and the other for the E1 channels of ODU B (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU B]). 2. To modify the parameter, type a new value. The number of E1 changes in base to the set channelling and the modulations. Next to the box, the maximum number of E1’s which can be set is indicated time by time (Max. ...xE1). The value 0 indicates that there are not high priority E1 channels set. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the Link identification number User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID. 2. Select the Local Link ID tab. The Local Link ID parameter indicates the Link identification number. 3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (value between 1 and 255). Set the value 0 to not use the Link identifier. 4. Press Apply and confirm. The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote equipment.

128

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined.

For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration, the BW & Mod./Link ID command is available which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more BW & Mod./Link ID commands. Every command opens a context area BW & Mod./Link ID containing the parameters relevant to the specific Radio Link. The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and Link identification number. Tabs

Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of the adaptive modulation. Local Link ID tab. Link identification number. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

BW & Mod./Link ID (command)

Modulation & Capacity tab The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. Parameters

BANDWIDTH & MODULATION Bandwidth. Radio channelling. Reference Modulation. Modulation. The availability of values is shown in Tab.5. PERMANENT TDM Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams). These streams cannot be discarded by the adaptive modulation. For the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC there are two parameter: one for the E1 channels of ODU A (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU A]) and the other for the E1 channels of ODU B (Permanent TDM Traffic [ODU B]). The maximum number of E1 which can be assigned permanently is indicated next to the box(es). Parameter(s) available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). ACM ENGINE CONFIGURATION ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation: •

Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.

•

Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.

Profile Management. Management of profiles for the adaptive modulation: •

High Gain. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high system gain. The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong to 256QAM, 512QAM Strong and 1024QAM Strong.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

129

•

High Throughput. Profile of adaptive modulation aimed to a high throughput. The available modulations are from 4QAM Strong a 256QAM, 512QAM, 1024QAM and 2048QAM.

Lower Profile / Upper Profile. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the ACM profile (code and modulation). The value changes according to the setting of the Profile Management parameter and of the radio configuration (see Tab.5). Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled. ACM TABLE This table shows, for each ACM level, the capacity used by Ethernet and TDM tributaries. Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. If the adaptive modulation is: •

Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).

•

Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.

For each ACM profile is pointed out: Active Modulation (ACM Table). Availability modulations. Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries. Max. TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Maximum number of E1’s (high priority) which can be assigned to TDM traffic for every ACM profile. Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile. The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity + TDM Capacity* + Maintenance Channel. * Value available only for equipment with TDM module. WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected reference band/modulation.

If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled. In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation. See also

Modify the reference band Modify the reference modulation Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation Modify the set of profiles used by the adaptive modulation Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) Verify/modify the number of E1’s permanently allocated

Local Link ID tab The tab displays the Link identification number. Parameters

Local Link ID. Link identification number. Set the value 0 to not use the Link identifier. See also

Verify/modify the Link identification number

130

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

General Preset User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the General Preset command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are more General Preset commands, one per every single Radio Link. The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters. Operations

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception Verify/modify the radio Link label GUI

General Preset contextual area

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset. The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm. 2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the radio Link label User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset. The Link Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio Link. 2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters). The operation changes also the Link Name value present in the Radio Configurator contextual area. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

131

General Preset contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined.

For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 XPIC configuration, the General Preset command is available which opens the General Preset contextual area. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) EW configuration there are more General Preset commands. Every command opens a context area General Preset containing the parameters relevant to the specific Radio Link. The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters. Parameters

Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception. Link Label. Label that identifies the radio Link. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

General Preset (command) Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception Verify/modify the radio Link label

132

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Xpic User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration.

The Xpic command manages the XPIC function. Operations

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection GUI

Xpic contextual area See also

XPIC function (info)

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > Xpic. The Xpic contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU User Profile |Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Equipment > Xpic. 2. To disable temporarily the function XPIC of: •

ODU A, select the Disable value (ODU A parameter).

•

ODU B, select the Disable value (ODU B parameter).

3. Press Apply. A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU User Profile |Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

133

2. To restore the XPIC function of the: •

ODU A, select the Enable value (ODU A parameter).

•

ODU B, select the Enable value (ODU B parameter).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) User Profile |Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > Xpic. 2. To ENABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the Enable value (Status parameter). To DISABLE the procedure, select the Disable value (Status parameter). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection User Profile |Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > Xpic. 2. Press Reset Procedure and confirm.

134

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Xpic contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link

in 2+0 XPIC configuration. The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function. Parameters

XPIC ODU A. Activation of XPIC function for ODU A: •

Enable. Function active.

•

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

ODU B. Activation of XPIC function for ODU B: •

Enable. Function active.

•

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

FAULT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE Status. Status of XPIC fault management procedure (FMP): •

Disable. FMP procedure is inactive.

•

Enable. FMP procedure is active.

When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on an ODU and the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other ODU are pointed out by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area. If a box becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the relevant to the relevant alarm), the box: ODU A FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one of the ODU’s belonging to Link A, the FMP procedure has switched off the ODU A from the local terminal. ODU A FMP: Xpic Disable, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one of the ODU’s belonging to Link A, the FMP procedure has forced the disabling of the XPIC function of the ODU A from the local terminal. ODU B FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one of the ODU’s belonging to Link B, the FMP procedure has switched off the ODU B from the local terminal. ODU B FMP: Xpic Disable, indicates that, after the detection of a fault on one of the ODU’s belonging to Link B, the FMP procedure has forced the disabling of the XPIC function of the ODU B from the local terminal. When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Reset Procedure. Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection See also

Xpic (command) XPIC function (info) Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

135

XPIC function (info)

XPIC function

The function XPIC (Crosspolar Interference Canceller) is a modem functionality which allows using the double polarization (vertical and horizontal) in the transmission system. In this way, exploiting two polarizations, the transmission capacity of the Radio Link can be double using a single frequency. WEB LCT

In relation to XPIC function, through GUI it is possible: •

To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single ODU (Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU). Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the timeout of the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until when it is restored by the user.

•

To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP). In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection).

FMP procedure

Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch where there are not problems The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to equipment faults. The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of the Xpic inputs. The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/ NMS5LX can restore the normal operating condition. See also

Xpic (command) Xpic contextual area

136

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

BASE BAND

Ethernet. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration: port physical Layer, layer 2 forwarding, VLAN settings, LLF, STP/RSTP, interface statistics. DCN (LAN 3). It manages the configuration of equipment management parameters: IP addressing and Routing Table. TDM Tributaries. It manages the TDM tributaries. Cross Connection. It manages the cross-connection matrix (TDM).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

137

Ethernet

Bridge Mode Conf.. It manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch. Port Manager. It manages the ports configuration of the Switch. VLAN. It manages the virtual LAN (VLAN) configuration. Prov. Bridge-VLAN. It manages the parameters relevant to VLAN’s when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality. Prov. Bridge-EtherType. It manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports. Header Compression. It manages the compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets of streams on the ports of a Radio Link. RSTP. It manages the Spanning Tree Protocol. LLF. It configures the operation of LLF functionality for the equipment. Queue Depth. It manages the depth of the output queues. Statistics. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/ bytes in input/output. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

138

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Bridge Mode Conf. User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Bridge Mode Conf. command manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch. Operations

Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch GUI

Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area

Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf. The Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area displays the current Bridge mode the Switch.

Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The operation involves the equipment restart.

Before performing the operation, it is necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol, if in use (see RSTP). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf. 2. In the Bridge Mode box, select the option: •

Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Customer Bridge is supported. This mode is supported for compatibility with the networks that do not manage the Service Tag (S_Tag). Moreover, in this mode, the transport on the Radio Link is more efficient, because a double Tag is not added.

•

Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single S-VLAN component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q). The ports of type Provider Network is supported.

•

Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN component and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Network, Customer Network and Customer Edge are supported.

In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to describe the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2 and MEF 6.1). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

139

Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area The contextual area displays the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch. Parameters

Bridge Mode. Operating modality of the Ethernet Switch: •

Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Customer Bridge is supported.

•

Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single S-VLAN component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q). The ports of type Provider Network and is supported.

•

Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN component and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Network, Customer Network and Customer Edge are supported.

In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to describe the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2 and MEF 6.1). Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Bridge Mode Conf. (command) Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch

140

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Port Manager User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Port Manager command manages the configuration of the Switch ports. Operations

Verify the Ethernet ports configuration Modify the type of interface Modify the enabling status of a port Activate the loop on line side of a port Deactivate the loop on line side of a port Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port Modify the transmission speed of a port Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its priority (User Priority) Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management GUI

Port Manager contextual area

Verify the Ethernet ports configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. The Port Manager contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet ports.

Modify the type of interface User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only for LAN 1 and LAN 2.

This operation involves the re-configuration of the port parameters Auto Neg. and MTU to the default value. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Media box relevant LAN 1 or LAN 2, select the option: •

Combo (Copper). Ethernet port with electrical interface.

•

Combo (Fiber). Ethernet port with optical interface.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

141

Modify the enabling status of a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Admin State box, select the option: • •

Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic. Enabled. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic. The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status Down).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Activate the loop on line side of a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of the equipment or the equipment reset. Operation available only if the port is enabled to use (Admin State - Enabled). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. Set the Loopback value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Deactivate the loop on line side of a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. Set the Enabled or Disabled value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only for the line ports of the Switch.

Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works correctly if the two peers have set the same modality for the autonegotiation management. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, set the box: •

Active ( ). The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex without flow control is proposed by default.

•

Inactive ( ). The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of a port), the flow control configured in the Data Flow tab, while the operation modality is Full Duplex.

The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb.

142

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. -

).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, press Restart and confirm.

Modify the transmission speed of a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for the line ports with electrical interface and autonegotiation disabled (Auto Neg. ).

The transmission speed of the data through the port with optical interface is always 1 Gbit/s. If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after the negotiation with the peer at the other end of the connection. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Speed box relevant the wished port, select the option: •

100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.

•

10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.

•

1 Gb. The data transmission speed through the port is 1 Gbit/s.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for line ports with electrical interface and disabled (Admin State - Dis-

abled). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the MDI/MDIX box relevant the wished port, select the option: •

MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

•

MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

•

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for the disabled ports (Admin State - Disabled).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

143

2. In the MTU box relevant the wished port, set a number between 46 and 12266. The value must correspond to the maximum dimension (in byte) of the data field accepted by the interface without the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the current Bridge modality of the Switch is Provider Edge Bridge (see Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area).

In Customer Bridge modality the port is always of type Customer Bridge, while in Provider Bridge (802.1ad) modality the port is of type Provider Network (see Physical Interface tab). For the line Ethernet ports, this operation involves the re-configuration of the following port parameters to the default values: Auto Neg., MTU and Ingress Filtering. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. In the Bridge Port Type box relevant the wished port, select the option: •

Provider Network. Port where S-TAG’s (NNI) are observed and managed if the equipment implements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More C-TAG’s can be present within one S-TAG.

•

Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user, in case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG received on this port are routed on a single S-VLAN. If this type of port is selected, the relevant parameter Acceptable Frame Type must be set to value UnTagged and Priority Tagged (see Port Settings tab).

•

Customer Edge - (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user already associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. Select the Optical tab. The tab displays the configuration of the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical interface available on the equipment.

Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for the port to the Radio it is assigned by default.

The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the command PAUSE. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. Select the Data Flow tab. The tab displays the configuration of the flow control.

144

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its priority (User Priority) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. 2. Select Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab. The tab contains a table which indicates, for each port, the traffic classes which a packet in input is assigned to depending on its priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (field User Priority). 3. To change the association priority-traffic class relevant to the packets in input from a port, execute one of the following actions: •

Double click on the port.

•

Select the row relevant to the port and press Show.

The Traffic Class Mapping window shows a table which indicates the traffic class (columns Classes) which the priority 802.1p (rows Priority) is assigned to, for the packets in input to the selected port. 4. In the table, select the option corresponding to the wished combination: priority value - traffic class. For the same priority value, only one class can be selected. The values of the traffic class range from 0 to 7. Every single value represents a type of traffic: •

0 - Best effort. Traffic not sensitive to QoS metric.

•

1 - Background. Traffic not interfering with the use of the network by users and applications.

•

2 - Standard (spare traffic). Traffic more important than that of Background type, but less important than the Excellent Load type.

•

3 - Excellent load. Traffic representing the best service offered to the most important customers.

•

4 - Controlled load. Traffic which must be received even when the network is overloaded.

•

5 - Video. Traffic with delay lower than 100 milliseconds (video traffic).

•

6 - Voice. Traffic with delay lower than 10 milliseconds (voice traffic).

•

7 - Network control. Traffic reserved to the network control.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager. The Tunneling tab shows the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is the modality for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

145

Port Manager contextual area WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF

services have been activated. The change of the forwarding parameters or of the port type by WEB LCT could prevent its operation. The contextual area displays the configuration of the Switch ports. Tabs

Physical Interface tab. General configuration of the ports. Optical tab. Displays the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical interface available on the equipment. Data Flow tab. Configuration of the flow control. Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab. Mapping between priority of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes. Tunneling tab. Configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Port Manager (command)

Physical Interface tab The tab displays the general configuration of the ports. Table

Every table row corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electric).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Read only parameter. Media. Type of interface: •

Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.

•

Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.

•

---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).

•

Combo (...). Ethernet port with interface programmable by the user: electrical or optical. The type of set interface is indicated in brackets: •

146

(Copper): electrical interface.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

(Fiber): optical interface.

Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the port and a device in network: •

Up. The Link works: the physical connection is active and ready for the traffic exchange.

•

Down. The Link does not work: no physical connection has been enabled or the established physical connection is not active or is defective.

Read only parameter. Admin State. Enabling state/loop of the port: •

Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.

•

Enabled. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic. The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work.

•

LoopBack. The line side loop is enabled for the port. Value available only if the port is in Enabled status.

Default Disabled. Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the port. The box: •

Active ( ) indicates that the autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex modality without flow control is proposed. The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb. In this condition, next to the box the button Restart is displayed: press it to restart the autonegotiation procedure for the port.

•

Inactive ( ), indicates that the autonegotiation is not enabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of a port), the flow control configured in the Data Flow tab, while the operation modality is Full Duplex.

•

---, indicates that the parameter is not meaningful for the port (e.g. Radio port).

Duplex. Transmission modality of the port: •

Full. The transmission modality is Full-Duplex.

•

Half. The transmission modality is Half-Duplex.

Read only parameter. Speed. Data transmission speed through the port: 10 Mb, 100 Mb, etc. MDI/MDIX. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines: •

MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

•

MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

•

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

•

---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).

Parameter meaningful only for ports with electrical interface. MTU. Maximum dimension, in byte, of the packet accepted by the port. The displayed value is the maximum value of the data field accepted by the interface without the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC. Bridge Port Type. Type of Bridge port: •

Customer Bridge. Port where C-TAG’s (UNI), are observed and managed if the equipment implements a Customer Bridge. Option available only when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

•

Provider Network. Port where S-TAG’s (NNI) are observed and managed if the equipment implements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More CTAG’s can be present within one S-TAG. Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Bridge (802.1ad) modality o Provider Edge Bridge modality.

•

Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user, in case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG received on this port are routed on a single S-VLAN. Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

147

•

Customer Edge (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user already associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge. Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Restart. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port. See also

Modify the type of interface Modify the enabling status of a port Activate the loop on line side of a port Deactivate the loop on line side of a port Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port Modify the transmission speed of a port Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port

Optical tab The tab displays the data of the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) optical module relevant to the Ethernet ports with optical interface available on the equipment. All parameter are read only. Table

Every table row corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port.

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port.

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port.

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port.

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port.

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port.

Fail Alarm. Status of the alarm which indicates the malfunctioning of the optical module (Plug-in module Fail Alarm). The colour of the box displays the status of the alarm: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Vendor Name. Name of the optical module. Vendor PN. Part number of the optical module. Vendor SN. Serial number of the optical module. Vendor Date. Manufacturing date of the optical module. Wave Length (nm). Wave length (in nanometres) of the optical module.

148

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps)). Nominal data transmission speed in Mbit/sec. Link Length 9um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 9/125 µm fiber supported by the optical module. Link Length 50um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 50/125 µm fiber supported by the optical module. Link Length 62.5um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 62.5/125 µm fiber supported by the optical module.

Data Flow tab The tab displays the configuration of the flow control. In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for the port to the Radio it is assigned by default. The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the command PAUSE. All parameters in the tab are read only. Table

Every table row corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Flow Control Admin Status. Management of the flow control assigned by default for the specific port: •

Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is disabled.

•

Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal congestion due to excess of received traffic.

•

Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data transmission if required by an external equipment.

•

Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.

Flow Control Oper Status. It displays the management modality of the flow control currently used by the specific port: •

Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is disabled.

•

Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal congestion due to excess of received traffic.

•

Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data transmission if required by an external equipment.

•

Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

149

Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab The tab shows the mapping between the priority 802.1p within the Tag VLan (field User Priority) of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes managed by the equipment. The packet received on a port with a specific priority will be forwarded according to the relevant traffic class. For the packets without Tag, the priority is equivalent to the value of Default User Priority of the port in input (see Port Settings tab). Table

Every table row corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Read only parameter. Priority 0. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 0 is assigned to. Priority 1. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 1 is assigned to. Priority 2. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 2 is assigned to. Priority 3. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 3 is assigned to. Priority 4. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 4 is assigned to. Priority 5. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 5 is assigned to. Priority 6. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 6 is assigned to. Priority 7. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User Priority value equal to 7 is assigned to. Push-button

Show. Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its priority (User Priority)

Tunneling tab WARNING L2CP tunneling cannot be partially overlapped: all needed tunnelings must be enabled at the

same port. In case of: •

Cascaded Links without traffic dropping, tunneling can be enabled at the first and the last port.

•

Cascaded Links with traffic dropping, tunnellings must be enabled on all intermediate ports.

The tab displays the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is the modality for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.

150

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

All parameters in the tab are read only. Parameters

MAC ADDRESS CONFIGURATION BPDU Priority. Predefined priority for all the BPDU packets encapsulated at level 2 and received on the tunnel ports: 0 ÷ 7. Default 7. STP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of BPDU STP packets. LACP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of LACP packets. Dot1x. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of Dot1x packets. GVRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GVRP packets. GMRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GMRP packets. TUNNEL STATUS Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). The list contains the ports of Customer Network (port-based) or Customer Edge type. Dot1x. State of the Tunneling for Dot1x protocol: •

Peer. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received Dot1x packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

LACP. State of the Tunneling for LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) protocol: •

Peer. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received LACP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

STP. State of the Tunneling for STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) protocol: •

Peer. The STP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received STP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The STP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

GVRP. State of the Tunneling for GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) protocol: •

Peer. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received GVRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

GMRP. State of the Tunneling for GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) protocol: •

Peer. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received GMRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

IGMP. State of the Tunneling for IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) protocol: •

Peer. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.

•

Tunnel. The received IGMP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.

•

Discard. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

151

VLAN User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING In AGS-20 equipment, VLAN’s work in the Switch in VLAN Aware Bridging modality.

In this modality, the bridge identify the packets with TAG VLAN and can insert and remove TAG’s in the packet heading. The Switch operates in compliance with Standard IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad. The command VLAN manages the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the virtual LAN’s (VLAN). Operations

BASIC SETTINGS Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch PORT SETTINGS Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received on the port STATIC VLANS Verify the existing static VLANs Create one or more static VLANs Modify the configuration of a static VLAN Delete one or more static VLANs GUI

VLAN contextual area

Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. The Basic Settings tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management.

Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Switch is available only if enabled this function.

The setting is common for all port of the Switch. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. In the Global MAC Learning Status box, select the option:

152

•

Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.

•

Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In this condition MAC Table is not used.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table (Global MAC Learn-

ing Status - Enable) is enabled. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. In the MAC Addr Table Aging Time box, set the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically acquired and stored in the specific table (number between 10 and 1000000 seconds). Default 300 seconds. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Set, in the box Unicast MAC Learning Limit, the limit of MAC Unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch (number between 0 and 16000). The limit represents the maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses which can be learned by the Switch. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation not available for the ports of type Customer Network (port-based) or Customer Edge (see Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab), which have always the value UnTagged and Priority Tagged.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Port Settings tab. 3. In the Acceptable Frame Types box relevant the wished port, select the option: •

All. The port accepts all the following packets: •

Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.

•

UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid by the port.

•

Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.

•

Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets are rejected.

•

UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

153

Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Port Settings tab. 3. In the Ingress Filtering box relevant the wished port, select the option: •

Enabled. The port accepts, in input, only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU and the input port must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.

•

Disabled. The port does not execute any check: all the packets are accepted.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The default VLAN identifier of a port is used to assign a VLAN to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged

packets received on the port itself. The parameter is used for the classification of the VLAN’s on port basis (Port-Based VLAN classification). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Port Settings tab. 3. In the PVID box relevant the wished port, set a value between 1 and 4094. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received on the port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Port Settings tab. 3. In the Default User Priority box relevant the wished port, set a value between 0 (lowest priority) and 7 (highest priority). 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing static VLANs User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Static VLANs tab. The tab displays the existing static virtual LANs.

154

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Create one or more static VLANs User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Static VLANs tab. 3. Press Add. 4. If you wish to create: •

More VLAN’s at the same time, expand the area Group Add. Set, in the box VLAN ID Start, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) of the first VLAN of the range. Set, in the box VLAN ID Stop, the identifier of the last VLAN of the range. The value of VLAN ID Stop must be greater than the value of VLAN ID Start and no VLAN with identifier between Start and Stop values must not be present in the list. The system creates a number of VLAN’s (and inserts the corresponding rows in the table) equal to the difference between the values of the parameters VLAN ID Stop and VLAN ID Start, with progressive identifiers from the lowest value to the highest value, and automatically assigns the corresponding VLAN Name using the format . All the VLAN’s created automatically assume the same enabling policy for the transit of packets through the ports of the Switch. The system guarantees the contemporary creation of maximum 100 VLANs.

•

A single VLAN, set, in the box VLAN ID, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN. An identifier greater then that indicated in the field Max. VLAN ID cannot be used. Set, in the box VLAN Name, the name (alphanumeric string, 32 characters at most) you wish to assign to the VLAN. The system automatically suggests, as VLAN name, VLAN . This name can be changed as you wish.

5. Activate ( ), in the box Member Ports, the ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal to the VLAN’s one. For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (LAN1, LAN 2, etc.) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider Network, etc.) (see Bridge Port Type, Physical Interface tab). At least one port must be activated to create a VLAN. 6. Activate ( from.

), in the box Untagged Ports, the ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed

For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (Mngt, LAN1, etc. - see Description, Physical Interface tab) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider Network, etc. - see Bridge Port Type, Physical Interface tab). 7. Select, in the box Ether Type, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which the packets must have to be identified as belonging to the VLAN: •

0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.

•

0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.

8. Press Apply and confirm. The Static VLANs tab displays the row relevant to the new VLAN.

Modify the configuration of a static VLAN User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Static VLANs tab. 3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLAN you wish to change. Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLAN can be modified (VLAN Name, Member Ports, Untagged Ports, Ether Type).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

155

The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create one or more static VLANs. 4. Press Apply and confirm. The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.

Delete one or more static VLANs User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN. 2. Select the Static VLANs tab. 3. Select the VLAN you wish to delete. The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. The system guarantees the contemporary deletion of maximum 100 VLANs. 4. Press Remove and confirm.

156

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

VLAN contextual area WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF

services have been activated. The change of parameters relevant to the VLAN management from WEB LCT could preclude the operation of the VLAN’s themselves. The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the virtual LAN’s (VLAN). Tabs

Basic Settings tab. Basic configuration of the VLAN management. Port Settings tab. VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the equipment. Static VLANs tab. Configuration of the existing static VLANs. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

VLAN (command)

Basic Settings tab The tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management. Parameters

LEARNING OPTIONS Learning Mode. Learning mode for the addresses in the MAC Table. The writing Independent VLAN Learning indicates that the partition and the indicization on VID basis of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled. The learning registers them in a MAC Table segment whose index is the value of the VID contained in the VLAN’s in input to the Switch and registered in VTU. In this modality, the information learned by a VLAN are not used by other VLAN’s for the packet forwarding. Parameter common to all port of the Switch. Global MAC Learning Status. Enabling status of the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table: •

Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.

•

Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In this condition MAC Table is not used.

Parameter common to all port of the Switch. MAC Add. Table Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses stored in the MAC Table (expressed in seconds). Default 300 seconds. Unicast MAC Learning Limit. Maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses per VLAN which can be learned by the Switch. VLAN STATUS Max. VLAN ID. VLAN identifier accepted by the Switch as maximum value. Read only parameter. Max Supported VLAN. Maximum number of VLAN’s which can be managed by the Switch. Read only parameter.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

157

Num of VLANs in the System. Total number of VLAN’s currently managed by the equipment. Read only parameter. See also

Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch

Port Settings tab The tab displays the VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the equipment. Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a port. Selecting the heading of a column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. For each port are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packets accepted in input by the port and subjected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering): •

All. The port accepts all the following packets: •

Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.

•

UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid by the port.

•

Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.

•

Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets are rejected.

•

UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.

Default All. The parameter has always value UnTagged and Priority Tagged for the ports of type Customer Network (port-based) and Customer Edge (see Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab). Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the port:

158

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

Enabled. The port accepts in input only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU and the port in input must be a member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.

•

Disabled. The port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.

Default Disabled. PVID. Default VLAN identifier assigned to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged packets received on the port itself: 1 ÷ 4094. The parameter is used for the VLAN classification on port basis (Port-Based VLAN classification). Default User Priority. Default value to insert in the field User Priority (priority 802.1p within Tag VLan) of the packets without priority value received on the port: 0 (lowest priority) ÷ 7 (highest priority). See also

Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received on the port

Static VLANs tab The tab displays the configuration of the physical ports of the Switch. The static VLAN’s are configured per port (Port-based VLAN) differently from the dynamic VLAN’s which are configured according to MAC address or to protocol. During the creation of a static VLAN, one port of the Switch is assigned to the specific VLAN, so that the device connected to that port automatically becomes member of the assigned VLAN. Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a VLAN for which are indicated: VLAN ID. VLAN identifier. Read only parameter. Selecting the heading of this column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. VLAN Name. VLAN name. Member Ports. Ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal to that of the VLAN. For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are separated by comma. Untagged Ports. Ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed from. For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are separated by comma. Ether Type. Value of EtherType which the packets in input must have to be identified as belonging to the VLAN: •

0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.

•

0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications

Push-button

Add. Create one or more static VLANs Remove. Delete one or more static VLANs See also

Modify the configuration of a static VLAN

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

159

Prov. Bridge-VLAN User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

All the parameters present in the tabs are read-only. They can be configured only via CLI. The command Prov. Bridge-VLAN displays the parameters relevant to the VLAN’s when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality. Operations

Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) GUI

Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area

Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN. The C-VID Registration tab shows the C-VID registration table.

Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN. The PEP Configuration tab shows the Provider Edge Port configuration table.

160

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF

services have been activated. The contextual area shows the parameters relevant to the VLAN’s when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality. Tabs

C-VID Registration tab. C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration). PEP Configuration tab. Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration). Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Prov. Bridge-VLAN (command)

C-VID Registration tab The tab displays the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration). An internal connection between one Customer Network (CNP) port on S-VLAN component and one Provider Edge (PEP) port on C-VLAN component is instanced for every VLAN. The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) and PEP configuration table (see PEP Configuration tab). In C-VID registration table, one entry is created for every C-VLAN supported in the C-VLAN component associated with one Customer Edge port (CEP). The CEP identifier and the C-VID combination identify one PEP. The entry contains (among the other parameters) a S-VID value corresponding to the PVID of CNP, which associates the PEP to a specific Customer Network port (CNP). All parameters in the tab are read only. Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type. C-VLAN ID. Customer VLAN ID value present in the C-TAG of the packets in input to the specific port: 1 ÷ 4094. S-VLAN ID. VLAN ID of the service instance which the port and the Customer VLAN ID are mapped to: 1 ÷ 4094. Untagged PEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID, in inputs to the Customer Edge port through the Provider Edge port: •

TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.

•

FALSE. The packets are forwarded with a valid C-TAG and C-VID.

Untagged CEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID through the Customer Edge port: •

TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.

•

FALSE. The packets are forwarded with TAG C-VLAN. If this is missing, it is added.

Push-button

Add. Push-button not available in this version. Remove. Push-button not available in this version.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

161

PEP Configuration tab The tab displays the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration). For every VLAN, one internal connection is instanced between one Customer Network port (CNP) on SVLAN component and one Provider Edge port (PEP) on C-VLAN component. The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (see C-VID Registration tab) and PEP configuration table. In PEP configuration table, one entry is created for every S-VID corresponding to one service instance accessible by the C-VLAN component. The Customer Edge Port (CEP) identifier and the S-VID combination identify one CNP. The entry contains (among the other parameters) one C-VID value corresponding to the PVID of PEP, which associates the CNP to a specific PEP. All parameters in the tab are read only. Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type. S-VID. S-VLAN identifier: 1 ÷ 4094. P-VID. Default VLAN identifier assigned to the UnTagged packets received on the PEP port: 1 ÷ 4094. Default User Priority. Default priority value (User Priority) assigned to the UnTagged packets received on the PEP port: 0 (lowest priority) ÷ 7 (highest priority). Default 0. Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU packets accepted in input by the PEP port and subjected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering): •

All. The port accepts all the following packets: •

Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.

•

UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid by the port.

•

Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.

•

Tagged Only. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets are rejected.

•

Untagged & Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.

Default Admit-All. Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the PEP port: •

TRUE. The port drops the packets classified to the specific C-VLAN if the port is not a member of the C-VLAN itself.

•

FALSE. The PEP port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.

Default FALSE. COS Preservation. Enabling status, for the PEP port, of the function Class of Service Preservation for a Service Provider: •

Enable. Function CoS preservation enabled: the mapping between the priority of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is preserved in the Provider network.

•

Disabled. Function CoS preservation disabled: the mapping between the priority of the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is not preserved in the Provider network.

Default Disabled.

162

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Prov. Bridge-EtherType User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge

Bridge modality. The Prov. Bridge-EtherType command manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports. Operations

Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports GUI

Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area

Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType. The Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area shows the EtherType values in the S-Tag (Service Tag) field for every Ethernet port.

Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Typical values of EtherType fields:

•

0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.

•

0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.

•

0x9100. Service VLAN Tag related to a “not standard QinQ protocol”.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType. 2. Set, in the field Ingress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must have the packets in input to the Ethernet port. For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports, the default value is 0x88a8. 3. Set, in the field Egress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must be applied to the packets in output from the Ethernet ports. For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports, the default value is 0x88a8. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

163

Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.

The contextual area displays the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports. Parameters

Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read-only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Read-only parameter. Ingress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag of the packets in input to the Ethernet port. For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports, the default value is 0x88a8. Egress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag applied to the packets in output from the Ethernet ports. For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports, the default value is 0x88a8. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Prov. Bridge-EtherType (command)

164

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Header Compression User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Header Compression allows managing the compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets of streams on the ports of a Radio Link. Operations

Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets GUI

Header Compression contextual area See also

Header Compression (info)

Verify the status of the function for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Header Compression. The Header Compression contextual area shows the status of the functionality for the radio port on the equipment.

Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Header Compression. The parameter H.C. Status indicates the enabling status functionality: •

Enable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is enabled.

•

Disable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is disabled.

2. To change the enabling status of the functionality, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Header Compression. The parameter Context Depth indicates the total size of the fields of the header you wish to compress. The number of available contexts (and then the number of streams which can be managed at the same time on the same Radio Link) changes with inverse relation to the selected context depth: •

16 bytes (up to 2048 contexts).

•

32 bytes (up to 1024 contexts).

•

64 bytes (up to 512 contexts).

•

128 bytes (up to 256 contexts).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

165

2. To change the context depth, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Header Compression. The parameter Parsing Mode indicates the modality used by the compressor to parse the header of the Ethernet packets in output from the LAN to the radio port: •

IPv4/IPv6 without C.W., EoMPLS with C.W.

•

EoMPLS without C.W.

•

Always IPv4/IPv6.

2. To change the parsing mode, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

166

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Header Compression contextual area

The contextual area displays the status of the Header Compression functionality for the Ethernet packets in output from the LANs to the radio. The lower part of the contextual area displays the protocols and the modes supported by the Parser of Header Compression functionality. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one radio port for which are indicated: Port. Identifier of the port. Read only parameter. H.C. Status. Enabling status of Header Compression functionality. •

Enable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is enabled.

•

Disable. The compression of the headers of the Ethernet packets is disabled.

Context Depth. The context depth is in inverse relation to the number of contexts. •

16 bytes (up to 2048 contexts).

•

32 bytes (up to 1024 contexts).

•

64 bytes (up to 512 contexts).

•

128 bytes (up to 256 contexts).

Parsing Mode. Modality used by the header of the Ethernet packets in output to the radio is examined for the compression: •

IPv4/IPv6 without C.W., EoMPLS without C.W.

•

EoMPLS without C.W.

•

IPv4/IPv6 without C.W.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Header Compression (command) Header Compression (info) Enable/disable the functionality for the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

167

Header Compression (info) Packets belonging to the same stream have a great part of their header (up to 90%) that does not change in time (IP and MAC addresses, TAG Ethernet, MPLS labels, etc). The Header Compression hop-by-hop functionality allows storing, at the ends of a Radio Link, all the information which repeats identical packet after packet and transmitting only the variable fields (Sequence Number, TimeStamp, etc). This allows achieving good gains in terms of throughput in presence of long communication streams characterized by a great number of packets (for example, real-time communication). In order to achieve this result, it is necessary to support a lot of streams at the same time, so to maximise the gain. The set of “static” information of the packets belonging to the same stream is stored by the compression/ decompression module and is defined “context”. The compression function will operate in the direction from LAN to Radio, while the decompression function will operate in the opposite direction. See also

Header Compression (command) Header Compression contextual area

168

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

RSTP User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command RSTP manages the Spanning Tree protocol. Operations

Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment OPERATIONS

AT

SWITCH

LEVEL

Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) OPERATIONS

AT

ETHERNET

PORT LEVEL

Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP) GUI

RSTP contextual area See also

STP/RSTP Protocol (info)

Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. 2. In the System Control box, set the Start value, press Apply and confirm. This operation activates the STP/RSTP function on every port of the Switch: the memory necessary for the operation is allocated. 3. Select the box Enable Ports, activate the ports you wish set for the RSTP function, press Apply and confirm. This operation creates an instance for every single port activated in the STP/RSTP table (see Port Settings tab and Port Status tab). 4. In order to change the default values of the general parameters of the Switch, execute the following procedures: Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Dynamic Path Cost Calculation - Default: Disable). Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Version - Default: RSTP Compatible). Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Priority - Default: 32768 (8). Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Tx Hold Count - Default: 6).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

169

Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) (parameters: Max Age - Default: 20 seconds, Hello Time - Default: 2 seconds, Forward Delay - Default: 15 seconds). 5. Select Port Settings tab. 6. Verify that the parameter RSTP Status is set to Enable for all the ports. Otherwise, set the value Enable, press Apply and confirm. The ports in state Enable are enabled to the operation of STP/RSTP protocol: the ports take part to the Spanning Tree process and are ready to transmit/receive BPDU packets. 7. In order to change the default values of the port parameters, execute the following procedures: Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Port Priority - Default: 128 (8). Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) (parameter: Path Cost - Default: 8000 for ODU ports and line ports configured at 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s and 2000000 for 10Mb/s). WARNING If, in this moment of the procedure, a software reset is performed (see Execute the equip-

ment software reset), the ports enabled to the use of STP/RSTP protocol (see step 6) are “locked” even if the use of STP/RSTP protocol is not completely enabled. In order to “unlock” them, it is necessary to disable the ports (set the parameter RSTP Status of every port to Disable) and then re-enable them (setting the parameter RSTP Status of every port to Enable). 8. Select Settings tab. 9. Set the value Enabled in the box Status, press Apply and confirm. This operation enables the use of the protocol STP or RSTP (depending on the selected version) for the equipment: the ports begin transmitting/receiving BPDU packets.

Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The parameter System Control indicates the enabling state, by the control system, of the STP/RSTP function for the Switch: •

Start. The system activates the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the necessary memory is allocated for the function.

•

Shutdown. The system stops the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the allocated memory is de-allocated and made available for other activities.

2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value. WARNING Selecting the value Shutdown involves the disabling and the loss of all the configurations

made by the user for the STP/RSTP function. In fact, when the value Start is selected later, all the parameters will be available set to their default value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The parameter Enable Ports indicates the setting of the STP/RSTP function for every Switch port. The box:

170

•

Active ( ) indicates that the STP/RSTP function is set for the port (the port is inserted in the STP/RSTP tables: Port Settings and Port Status).

•

Inactive ( ) indicates that the port is not set for the STP/RSTP function (the port is not present in STP/RSTP tables).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

The port identifier (slot number/port number) and the port name (LAN 1, LAN 2 etc.) is indicated for every port. 2. To change the parameters, activate or deactivate the wished boxes. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The parameter Status indicates the enabling state of STP/RSTP function: •

Enabled. Activates the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports transmit/receive the BPDU packets.

•

Disabled. Disables the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports do not transmit/receive the BPDU packets.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

If the default value of a port is changed (see Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP)), this value will be used as Path Cost independently from the state (Enable or Disable) of the parameter Dynamic Path Cost Calculation. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The Dynamic Path Cost Calculation parameter indicates the state of the dynamic path cost calculation function. The Path Cost represents the distance between the port Root and the port Designated. The Path Cost, according to the Specification 802.1d, is calculated dividing the bit rate by the bandwidth of the segment connected to the port: •

Enable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the ports whose administrative state is active (Enabled) in that moment. The path cost, once calculated, is not changed depending on the operating state of the ports.

•

Disable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the connection when the port is created.

2. To change the parameters, select the wished options. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The Version parameter indicates the Spanning Tree protocol version currently used by the Switch. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

STP Compatible. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

171

•

RSTP Compatible. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1D-2004. Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The Priority parameter indicates the priority assigned to the Switch. This value is used during the election of the Root. 2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. Values between 0 (highest priority) and 61440 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided by intervals of 4096: 0, 4096 (1), 8192 (2), 12288 (3), 16384 (4), 20480 (5) and so on up to 61440 (15). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. 2. The parameter Tx Hold Count indicates the maximum number of BPDU packets which can be transmitted within a given interval. The parameter is common for all the ports of the Switch. 3. To change the parameter, select a value between 1 and 10. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the System Control parameter has Start value.

The parameters are common for all the ports of the Switch. The parameter setting must respect the formula 2 x (Forward Delay - 1) ≥ Max Age ≥ 2 x (Hello Time +1). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The parameter: •

Max Age, indicates the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment.

•

Hello Time, indicates the time interval between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet, generated by the Switch.

•

Forward Delay, indicates the time interval which passes between the passage between the Discarding status and the Learning status and between the Learning status and the Forwarding status of the port.

2. To change the parameter in the box: •

172

Max Age, select a value between 6 and 40 seconds.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

Hello Time, select a value between 1 and 2 seconds.

•

Forward Delay, select a value between 4 and 30 seconds.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. 2. Select Port Settings tab. The parameter Port Priority indicates the priority of every single port. This value is used during the process for the selection of the port role. 3. In order to change a parameter, select the box Port Priority relevant to the wished port and select a value between 0 (highest priority) and 240 (lowest priority). Values are subdivided in intervals of 16: 0, 16 (1), 32 (2), 48 (3) and so on up to 240 (15). 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. 2. Select Port Settings tab. The parameter RSTP Status indicates the enabling state for the operation of the STP/RSTP protocol of every single port: •

Disable. Protocol operation disabled: the port does not take part to the Spanning Tree process and does not transmit/receive BPDU packets.

•

Enable. Protocol operation enabled: the port takes part to the Spanning Tree process and is ready to transmit/receive BPDU packets.

3. In order to change a parameter, select the box RSTP Status relevant to the wished port and select the wished option. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The default value of Path Cost for every single port is automatically set as function of the port

bit rate: 8000 for ODU ports and line ports configured to 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s and 2000000 for 10Mb/s. If the default value of the port cost is changed, this value will be used as Path Cost independently from the state (Enable or Disable) of the parameter Dynamic Path Cost Calculation. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. 2. Select Port Settings tab. The Path Cost parameter indicates the cost of the network portion directly connected to every single port. 3. In order to modify a parameter, select the box Path Cost relevant to the wished port and set a value between 1 and 200 000 000. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

173

Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > RSTP. The Port Status tab displays the information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP functionality.

174

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

RSTP contextual area The contextual area displays the parameters for management of Spanning Tree protocol. Tabs

Settings tab. Parameters of the STP/RSTP module, used at global level by the Switch and by all its ports. Port Settings tab. Parameters of the Ethernet ports relevant to STP/RSTP function. Port Status tab. Information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP functionality. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

RSTP (command) STP/RSTP Protocol (info)

Settings tab The tab displays the general basic parameters of the STP/RSTP module, used at global level by the Switch and all its ports. Parameters

GLOBAL CONFIGURATION System Control. Enabling state, by the control system, of the STP/RSTP function for the Switch: •

Start. The system activates the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the necessary memory is allocated for the function.

•

Shutdown. The system stops the STP/RSTP function on every Switch port: the allocated memory is made available for other activities.

Default Shutdown. Enable Ports. Setting of the STP/RSTP function for every Switch port. The active box ( ) indicates that the STP/RSTP function is set for the port (the port is inserted in the STP/RSTP tables: Port Settings and Port Status); the inactive box ( ) indicates that the STP/RSTP function is not set for the port (the port is not present in the STP/RSTP tables). The identifier of the port (slot number/port number) and the port name (LAN 1, LAN 2 etc.) is indicated for every port. By default, all the ports are disabled. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Dynamic Path Cost Calculation. State of the path cost dynamic calculation function. The Path Cost represents the distance between the port Root and the port Designated. The Path Cost, according to the Specification 802.1d, is calculated dividing the bit rate by the bandwidth of the network portion connected to the port: •

Enable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the ports whose administrative state is active (Enabled) in that moment. The path cost, once calculated, is not changed according to the operating state of the ports.

•

Disable. The Path Cost is calculated according to the bit rate of the connection when the port is created.

Default Disable. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Status. Enabling state of the STP/RSTP function:

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

175

•

Enabled. Activates the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports transmit/ receive the BPDU packets.

•

Disabled. Disables the STP/RSTP function in the Switch: the ports do not transmit/receive the BPDU packets.

Default Disabled. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Dynamic Path Cost Lag-Speed. Parameter not meaningful in the current system version. For future use. RSTP CONFIGURATION Version. Spanning Tree protocol version currently used by the Switch: •

STP Compatible. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

•

RSTP Compatible. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1D-2004. Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

Default RSTP Compatible. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Priority. Priority assigned to the Switch. This value is used during the election of the Root. Values between 0 (highest priority) and 61440 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided in intervals of 4096: 0, 4096 (1), 8192 (2), 12288 (3), 16384 (4), 20480 (5) and so on, up to 61440 (15). Default 32768 (8). Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Tx Hold Count. Maximum number of BPDU packets which can be transmitted within a given interval. Default 6. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Max Age.Maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment. Default 20 seconds. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Hello Time. Interval between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet, generated by the Switch. Default 2 seconds. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. Forward Delay. Time interval which passes between the passage between the Discarding status and the Learning status and between the Learning status and the Forwarding status of the port. Default 15 seconds. Parameter available only if the System Control parameter has Start value. See also

Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP)

176

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Port Settings tab The tab displays the parameters of the Ethernet ports in relation to STP/RSTP function. Table

Every table row corresponds to one port set for the STP/RSTP function (parameter Enable Ports, box active). The table will be empty if the parameter System Control has value Shutdown or if the parameter Enable Ports has not active values (see Settings tab). Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Read only parameter. Port Role. Role assigned by STP/RSTP to the port. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the state of the Bridge in the network: •

Disabled. Porta disabled manually (state STP/RSTP) or automatically (Link): it will not take part to Spanning Tree process.

•

Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) to the Bridge elected Root. Every Bridge can have only one Root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at steady state, every Root port is in state Forwarding.

•

Alternate. Port alternative to the Root port, as it offers an alternative path to the Bridge Root with cost higher with respect to the Root port. Generally, the Alternate port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Root if the Root port is in state Discarding.

•

Designated. Port which does not offer paths to the Bridge Root and is used to forward the information of the Bridge Root to other Bridges. Every Designated port is in state Forwarding. In every segment, only one port is Designated.

•

Backup. Port physically connected to a Lan where a Designated port of the same Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Designated if the current Designated port is in state Discarding.

Read only parameter. Port Priority. This value is used during the process of selection of the port role (see Port Role). Values between 0 (highest priority) and 240 (lowest priority) are available, subdivided in intervals of 16: 0, 16 (1), 32 (2), 48 (3), 64 (4), 80 (5) and so on up to 240 (15). Default 128 (8). RSTP Status. Port enabling state as regards the operation of STP/RSTP protocol: •

Disable. Protocol operation disabled: the port does not take part to Spanning Tree process and does not receive/transmit BPDU packets.

•

Enable. Protocol operation enabled: the port stake part to Spanning Tree process and is ready to receive/transmit BPDU packets.

Default Enable. Path Cost. Cost of the network segment directly connected to the port. It represents the distance between the port Root and the port Designated.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

177

The default value is automatically set depending on the port bit rate: 8000 for ODU ports and line ports configured at 2.5 Gb/s, 20000 for 1Gb/s, 200000 for 100Mb/s and 2000000 for 10Mb/s. The selection of

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

Sort Ascending. Not available in this context. Sort Descending. Not available in this context. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

See also

Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP) Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP)

Port Status tab The tab displays the information stored by every Switch port as regards the STP/RSTP functionality. All the parameters are read-only. Table

Every table row corresponds to one port set for the STP/RSTP function (parameter Enable Ports, active box). The table will be empty if the parameter System Control has value Shutdown or if the parameter Enable Ports has not active values (see Settings tab). Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Port Role. Role assigned by STP/RSTP to the port. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the state of the Bridge in the network:

178

•

Disabled. Porta disabled manually (state STP/RSTP) or automatically (Link): it will not take part to Spanning Tree process.

•

Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) to the Bridge elected Root. Every Bridge can have only one Root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at steady state, every Root port is in state Forwarding.

•

Alternate. Port alternative to the Root port, as it offers an alternative path to the Bridge Root with cost higher with respect to the Root port. Generally, the Alternate port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Root if the Root port is in state Discarding.

•

Designated. Port which does not offer paths to the Bridge Root and is used to forward the information of the Bridge Root to other Bridges. Every Designated port is in state Forwarding. In every segment, only one port is Designated.

•

Backup. Port physically connected to a Lan where a Designated port of the same Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in state Discarding. It is enabled and declared Designated if the current Designated port is in state Discarding.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Port State. Current state of the port in relation to RSTP functionality. Receive traffic

Forward traffic

Update the Address Table Unit

Receive/ process BPDU

Re-transmit BPDU

Discarding

No

No

No

Yes

No

Learning

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Port status

Designated Root. Univocal identifier of the Bridge registered as Root for the segment of the network which the port is connected to. Designated Cost. Path Cost of the Designated port of the segment connected to the porta. Designated Bridge. Univocal identifier of the Bridge which the port considers the Bridge Designated for the segment of the port. The Bridge Designated is the only Bridge allowed to transmit the packets from/to the segment. Designated Port. Identifier of the port on the Bridge Designated for the relevant segment. It represents the port through which the Bridge Designated forwards/receive the packets to/from the segment. Type. Operating state of the port in relation to the LAN segment connected to the port: •

SharedLan. The port is treated as connected to a shared connection.

•

Point-to-Point. The port is treated as connected to a point-to-point connection.

The selection of

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

Sort Ascending. Not available in this context. Sort Descending. Not available in this context. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

See also

Verify the information stored by every single Switch port (STP/RSTP)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

179

STP/RSTP Protocol (info)

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity. The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status. If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path. To make this possible, STP needs to know the whole network. The Bridges have to define the main Bridge (Bridge Root) and calculate the role of the ports (Root, Designated, etc.) using the known information. To ensure that every bridge has the information, the Bridges use special packets called Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDU) for the exchange of information on the ID’s of the Bridges and on the cost of the path from the Root element. The BPDU packets are periodically exchanged and allow the Switch keeping trace of the network changes to start and stop the transmission of the ports, on demand. A Bridge sends a BPDU packet using the univocal MAC address of the port as source address and the STP multicast address 01:80:C2:00:00:00 as destination address. For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol). Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

The protocol Rapid STP decreases, with respect to STP, the time necessary for the re-configuration of the active network when the physical topology or the network configuration parameters are changed. The RSTP protocol has been designed to be compatible with the STP protocol. For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol). AGS-20

The equipment can be configured to work with the STP protocol or the RSTP protocol (see Verify/ modify the version of the protocol (STP/RSTP)). The use of the protocol must be enabled at Switch level and at single port level (see Enable/ disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment). Before enabling the protocol, it is suggested to set the relevant configuration parameters. By WEB LCT, it is possible to configure: PARAMETERS

AT

SWITCH

LEVEL

System Control (see Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function). Enable Ports (see Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function). Dynamic Path Cost Calculation (see Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP). Status (see Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function). Priority (see Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch (STP/RSTP). Tx Hold Count (see Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission (STP/RSTP). Max Age, Hello Time e Forward Delay (see Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets (STP/RSTP). PARAMETERS

AT PORT LEVEL

Port Priority (see Verify/modify the priority of a port (STP/RSTP). RSTP Status (see Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port). Path Cost (see Verify/modify the cost of the a port (STP/RSTP).

180

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

LLF User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command LLF allows configuring the operation of LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) functionality for the equipment. Operations

Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio GUI

LLF contextual area See also

Bidirectional LLF (info)

Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. The LLF contextual area displays the status of the LLF functionality for every equipment port.

Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. 2. Press Add in Ports area. 3. Set, in the Port box, the LAN for the functionality is configured. It is not possible to select the port LAN 3 or a port already selected for the functionality. 4. Set, in the LLF Status box, the status of LLF functionality: •

Disable. The functionality is disabled.

•

Enable. The functionality is enabled.

5. Set, in the Alarm to Circuit box, the status of forwarding of the LLF alarm on a given radio circuit associated to the considered port: •

Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.

•

Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.

6. Set, in the Delay Time box, the interval (hysteresis) (value between 0 and 10 seconds) after which the modality Link Loss Forwarding in reception is activated. The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id. Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

181

In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN. 7. Only if the equipment has set the Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC or if the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W it is necessary to set, in the box Protection Mode, the propagation mode of LLF alarm: •

Disable. The alarm LLF is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.

•

Enable. The alarm LLF is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.

8. Press OK.

Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING A port cannot be removed if there is at least one radio circuit associated to the port itself. If the operator attempts executing this operation, the system displays an error message. First remove all the radio circuits associated to the LAN and then remove the port.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. 2. Select the row of the table in the Ports area corresponding to the port for which you wish not to manage the LLF functionality. 3. In the Ports area, press Remove and confirm.

Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if:

•

The equipment has at least one Radio Link defined.

•

The specific port has been configured for the management of the LLF functionality.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. 2. In the Ports area, select the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the functionality. 3. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, press Add. 4. In the Add New Circuit window, set the values of the following parameters: •

Circuit. Circuit of the radio where transmitting the LOS signal. Every radio has eight circuits. It is not possible to select an already used circuit (displayed grey in the selection menu).

•

LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LOS alarm on the radio circuit: •

Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.

•

Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.

5. Press OK.

Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. 2. Select, in the Ports area, the row of the table corresponding to the port for which you wish to remove a radio circuit.

182

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3. Select, in the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the row of the table corresponding to the radio circuit you wish to remove. 4. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, press Remove and confirm.

Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the management of the LLF functionality has been configured for the specific port.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. The LLF Status box indicates the enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port: •

Disable. The functionality is disabled.

•

Enable. The functionality is enabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in the menu. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the management of the LLF functionality has been configured for the specific port.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. The box Alarm to Circuit indicates the enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm for the LAN considered on the radio: •

Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the remote equipment.

•

Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote equipment by means of the selected radio circuit.

2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in menu. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the management of the LLF functionality has been configured for the specific port.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. The box Delay Time indicates the hysteresis value (in seconds) for the LLF functionality in reception. The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id. Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN. In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN. 2. To change the hysteresis value, type the wished value in the box. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

183

Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only:

•

For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC or equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W.

•

If the specific port has been configured for the management of the LLF functionality.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. The box Protection Mode indicates the propagation modality of the LLF alarm: •

Disable. The alarm LLF is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.

•

Enable. The alarm LLF is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.

2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in the menu. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the specific circuit of the radio for the forwarding of

the LOS alarm present on the LAN has been configured. 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. 2. Select, in the Ports area, the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the functionality. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the box LOS to Circuit indicates the enabling status of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit: •

Disable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is not forwarded to the radio.

•

Enable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is forwarded to the radio.

3. Press OK.

184

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

LLF contextual area The contextual area shows the configuration of the LLF functionality (Link Loss Forwarding). Parameters

PORTS Port. Identifier of the port. The ID value is the combination between the slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read-only parameter. Descr. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).

•

LAN 4. Fourth Ethernet line port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth Ethernet line port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth Ethernet line port (optical).

•

LAN C. Seventh Ethernet line port (optical)

•

LAN D. Eighth Ethernet line port (optical).

Read-only parameter. LLF Status. Enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port: •

Disable. The functionality is disabled.

•

Enable. The functionality is enabled.

Alarm to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm present on the considered LAN to the radio: •

Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the remote equipment.

•

Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote equipment by means of the selected radio circuit.

Delay Time. Hysteresis (in seconds) of LLF functionality in reception. The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id. Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN. In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN. Protection Mode. Propagation modality of LLF alarm: •

Disable. The LLF alarm is propagated when at least one radio is alarmed.

•

Enable. The LLF alarm is propagated when all the radios are alarmed.

Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Links in configuration 2+0 XPIC or with equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W. MAPPED

CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION

Circuit. Radio circuit where forwarding the LOS signal. Link ID. Identifier of the considered Radio Link. LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit: •

Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.

•

Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.

Signal Fail. Indication of alarm present on the circuit. Push-button

Apply. Confirms the changes. Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. PORTS Add. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality Remove. Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

185

MAPPED

CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION

Add. Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN Remove. Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN Refresh Signal Fail. Updates the alarm signal. See also

LLF (command) Bidirectional LLF (info) Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio

186

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Bidirectional LLF (info) The bidirectional LLF functionality allows interrupting the connection with the remote equipment (in both directions) as consequence of the disabling of the LANs of the local equipment due to Link Loss Forwarding. For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio connection, it is necessary to perform the operations described in the following example. Suppose you wish to disable the LAN-1 ports (on local and remote equipment) as consequence of LLF detected by the local LAN-1 port. The Radio Link is in 1+0 configuration. Operations to perform for the LOCAL equipment via the GUI: a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values: Port: LAN 1 LLF Status: Enable Alarm to Circuit: Enable Delay Time: any value c. Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN selecting LAN 1 in the Ports area and setting the following values: Circuit: #1 Link ID: ODU-A LOS to Circuit: Enable d. Press Apply and continue. Operations to perform for the REMOTE equipment via the GUI: a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF. b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values: Port: LAN 1 LLF Status: Enable Alarm to Circuit: Enable Delay Time: any value c. Press Apply and continue. With this configuration, an alarm in reception on the remote terminal causes the activation of LLF alarm and the consequent disabling of the associated LAN-1 port on both the terminals. See also

LLF (command) LLF contextual area

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

187

Queue Depth User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Queue Depth manages the depth of the output queues. Operations

Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output GUI

Queue Depth contextual area

Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth. The Queue Depth contextual area displays policy used to manage the depth of the queues in output.

Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth. 2. Press the option Activate relevant to the policy you wish to activate and confirm.

188

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Queue Depth contextual area The contextual area displays the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output (8 queues per port). The Switch can insert a limited number of packets into every queue. This limit, indicated as depth, can be configured by the user. During the period of high traffic, a queue is filled by packets waiting for the transmission. When a queue reaches its limit, by default the Switch discards the packets until when the queue is not full longer. Parameters

Profile. Available profiles of the output queues: •

Full dynamic memory. This configuration, identical for every queue, allows the dynamic allocation of memory per queue up to 1/8 of the total memory available in every moment.

•

Priority based memory allocation.... This configuration is based on the principle for which the lower priority traffic needs longer queues. The proper forwarding of the traffic at the different priorities (and queue) allows achieving the wished length.

•

Uniform memory allocation.... This configuration provides queues with constant length, independently from the traffic priority. The use of WRED algorithms allows changing the method used to store the different traffic types, obtaining different depths.

•

Line ports dynamic memory (no radio port). This configuration, identical for every queue of the line ports, allows the dynamic allocation of memory per queue up to 1/ 8 of the total memory available in every moment. The radio ports are not used.

Profile Description. Detailed description of the configuration of the selected profile. If the selected option is: •

Full dynamic memory. The description is the following: Full dynamic memory allocation (hardware default) Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 0 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 96 Mbyte Radio ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0 Radio ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 17 Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0 Line ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 17

•

Priority based memory allocation (1 radio port). The description is the following: Memory allocation dependent on scheduling priority Lower priority queues are wider than higher priority queues Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 81.5 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 14.5 Mbyte Radio port reserved memory [Mbyte]: 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1, 0.512, 0.256 Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0.512, 0.256, 0.128, 0.064, 0.032, 0.032, 0.032 Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 1.4

•

Uniform memory allocation (1 radio port). The description is the following: Uniform memory allocation At each port, all queues have the same length Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 76.5 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 19.5 Mbyte Radio port reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4 Line ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 0.512 Radio port dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4 Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4.3

•

Priority based memory allocation (2 radio ports). The description is the following: Memory allocation dependent on scheduling priority Lower priority queues are wider than higher priority queues

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

189

Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 82 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 14 Mbyte Radio ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 16, 8, 4, 2, 1.000, 0.512, 0.256, 0.128 Radio ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 8, 4, 1, 1, 0.750, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200 Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0.512, 0.256, 0.128, 0.064, 0.032, 0.032, 0.032, 0.032 Line ports dynamic memory [Mbyte]: 0.750, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200, 0.200 •

Uniform memory allocation (2 radio ports). The description is the following: Uniform memory allocation At each port, all queues have the same length Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 54 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 42 Mbyte Radio ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 2.0 Radio ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 7.6 Line ports reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 0.256 Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4.2

•

Line ports dynamic memory (no radio port). The description is the following: Restricted dynamic memory allocation: Reference frame length: 2048 byte Total reserved memory: 0 Mbyte Total dynamic memory: 96 Mbyte Line ports reserved memory [Mbyte]: 0 Line ports dynamic memory per queue [Mbyte]: 17

Action. Status of the profile: •

Currently Active. Profile currently in use.

•

Activate. Profile not in use. Select the option to Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output.

Push-button

Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. See also

Queue Depth (command)

190

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Statistics

Interface. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/ bytes in input/output. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

191

Interface User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Interface command displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/bytes in input/output The count of a counter is cyclic and always active. The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32; when this limit is reached, the count restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group). Operations

Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group) Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) GUI

Interface contextual area

Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface. The Interface tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group).

Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistics counter (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-

vice Statistics). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface. 2. In the Interface tab, press Reset Counters and confirm. All the counters of the tab are set to zero.

Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface. 2. Select the Ethernet tab. The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group).

192

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-

vice Statistics). 1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface. 2. Select the Ethernet tab. 3. Press Reset Counters and confirm. All the counters of the tab are set to zero.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

193

Interface contextual area The contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/bytes in input/output. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group). Tabs

Interface tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Interfaces group). Ethernet tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Ethernet-like Statistics group). Push-button

Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Interface (command)

Interface tab The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group). Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Descr. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.6). Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Reset Counters. Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group).

Ethernet tab The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group). Table

Each row of the table corresponds to a port for which are indicated: Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Descr. Name of the port: •

194

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.7). Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Reset Counters. Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group). Tab.6 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group) Packets with length lower than 64 octects (Undersize packet)

Packet with length longer than n (MTU value) octets (Oversize packet)

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Received Octects Total number of octets received

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Received Unicast Packets Total number of Unicast packets received

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Not Unicast Packets Total number of Non-Unicast packets received

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Discards (Packets) Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due to forbidden forwarding or policing violation

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Errors Total number of inbound packets discarded because contained errors.

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Transmitted Octects Total number of transmitted octets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Transmitted Unicast Packets Total number of Unicast packets transmitted

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Transmitted Not Unicast Packets Total number of Non-Unicast packets transmitted

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Transmitted Discards (Packets) Total number of outbound packets discarded

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Counter Description

Packet with length between 64 and n (MTU value) octets (Good packet)

x Counter incremented - Counter not incremented. * OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct. KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

195

FCS *

Tab.7 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group) Packets with length lower than 64 octects (Undersize packet)

Packet with length longer than n (MTU value) octets (Oversize packet)

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the Frame Check Error status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. This value does not include packets shorter than 64 bytes.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Frame Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the Frame Too Long status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

KO

Counter Description

Align. Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the Alignment Error status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.

Packet with length between 64 and n (MTU value) octets (Good packet)

x Counter incremented - Counter not incremented. * OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct. KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

196

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

FCS *

DCN (LAN 3)

MNGT Port Configuration. It manages the Ethernet port reserved to supervision of the equipment (LAN 3). Routing Table. It manages the Routing Table of the equipment.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

197

MNGT Port Configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING In version 1.1, the system can be managed by means of the In-Band Management using the

port LAN 3 (management port) for the contemporary transport of traffic and supervision (VLAN dedicated). The MNGT Port Configuration command manages the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote supervision of the equipment (management port). Operations

Verify the configuration of the management port Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision Modify the enabling status of management port Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port Modify the transmission speed of the management port Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port GUI

MNGT Port Configuration contextual area

Verify the configuration of the management port User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. The MNGT Port Configuration contextual area displays the configuration of the management port.

Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the IP Address box, set the IP address of the management port. The address has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field. 3. In the Net Mask box, set the mask for the network address definition. 4. Press Apply and confirm. 5. Press Store and confirm. 6. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.

198

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

3. Press Apply and confirm. 4. Press Store and confirm. 5. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The management VLAN must be present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab) and, in order to operate correctly as VLAN for the In-band Management, LAN 3 must be enabled for the transit of the packets with VLAN ID equal to that of VLAN.

The VLAN can have, as Member Port, other Ethernet ports. In this case, even these ports will be used for the contemporary transit of traffic and supervision (In-band Management). 1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. Set, in the VLAN ID box, the wished VLAN. The list will display all the VLAN’s registered in VLAN Table. 3. Press Apply and confirm. 4. Press Store and confirm. 5. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the enabling status of management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the Admin State box, select the option: •

Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.

•

Enabled. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic. The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status Down).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works properly if the two peers have set the same autonegotiation management modality.

The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter. 1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the Auto Neg. box, select the option: •

Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the modality Full Duplex without flow control is proposed.

•

Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of the management port), the flow control id disabled and the operation modality is Full Duplex.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

199

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the transmission speed of the management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is disabled (Auto Neg. - Disabled).

If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after having negotiated with the peer at the other end of the connection. The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter. 1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the Speed box, select the option: •

100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.

•

10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. - Enabled).

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm.

Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The alarm can be enabled/disabled using the Alarm Severity Config. command.

The only difference is that, with this operation, you intervene only on the alarm Loss of Signal of the management port (LAN 3) while, in the context Alarm Severity Config, you intervene on the alarm Loss of Signal of all the LANs. Depending on the setting made in the two contexts, the alarm status will be as indicated in Tab.8. 1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > MNGT Port Configuration. 2. In the Port Alarm Report box, select the option: •

Disabled, to disable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred.

•

Enabled, to enable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history alarms.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

200

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Tab.8 Enabling status of the Loss of Signal alarm Context MNGT Port Configuration (Port Alarm Report)

Alarm Severity Config * (Severity)

Loss of Signal Alarm

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled alarm

Enabled

Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical

Enabled alarm

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled alarm

Disabled

Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical

Disabled alarm

* In this context the Loss of Signal Alarm is called ethLanPhyLinkLoss.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

201

MNGT Port Configuration contextual area The contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote supervision of the equipment (management port). Parameters

IP Address. IP address of the management port. Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition. Default Gateway. IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway from the management port. VLAN ID. VLAN reserved for the in band supervision (In-Band Management). PHYSICAL INTERFACE Port Alarm Report. Enabling state of the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port: •

Disabled. Alarm disabled: the detection of the alarm is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred.

•

Enabled. Alarm enabled: the detection of the alarm is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history alarms.

Admin State. Enabling state of the management port: •

Disabled. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.

•

Enabled. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.

The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work. Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the management port and a device in network: •

Up. The physical connection is active and ready for the traffic exchange.

•

Down. The physical connection does not work: no physical connection has been enabled or the established physical connection is not active or is defective.

Read only parameter. Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port: •

Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the Link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex modality without flow control is proposed.

•

Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in the Speed box, the flow control is disabled and the operation modality is Full Duplex.

Speed. Data transmission speed of the management port. •

100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.

•

10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Store. Store the values into the equipment controller. Restart. Execute the equipment software reset. Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller. Restart Auto Neg. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port.

202

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

See also

MNGT Port Configuration (command) Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision Modify the enabling status of management port Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port Modify the transmission speed of the management port Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

203

Routing Table User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks is not necessary, the Routing Table must not be necessarily defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic. Setting the Routing Table is necessary when equipment must send packets between two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).

The Routing Table command manages the Routing Table of the equipment. Operations

Verify the Routing Table of the equipment Add an element to the Routing Table Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table GUI

Routing Table contextual area

Verify the Routing Table of the equipment User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table. The Routing Table contextual area displays the Routing Table of the equipment.

Add an element to the Routing Table User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table. 2. Press Add. 3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element. 4. Into the Subnet Mask box, type the mask for the destination IP network. 5. Set, in Next Hop box, the type of the next element by which the IP network or the destination element can be reached: •

Interface. Local interface to the equipment.

•

Gateway. Network element which allows reaching a remote network.

6. If, in the step before, the selected value is: •

Interface, set in the box Interface the option: •

VLAN. Local equipment interface, where the management traffic routed by VLAN (see MNGT Port Configuration contextual area). This element is mandatorily associated to the routing via VLAN.

• •

LCT. Interface for the local management of the equipment (connettore LCT).

Gateway, set the IP address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network in the Gateway box.

7. Set, in the Distance box, the metric value of the destination (value between 1 and 255). 8. Press Apply and confirm. The new element is inserted into the table.

204

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table. 2. Select the element of the Routing Table. Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. 3. Press Remove and confirm. The system deletes the element into the Routing Table of the equipment.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

205

Routing Table contextual area The contextual area shows the Routing Table currently used by the equipment. Table

Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table for which are indicated: Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element. Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway. Parameter not meaningful for the elements relevant to the equipment local interfaces (VLAN). Subnet Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element. Interface. Local interface of the equipment. •

VLAN. Interface where the management traffic is routed by VLAN (see MNGT Port Configuration contextual area. This element is mandatorily associated to the routing through VLAN.

•

LCT. Interface for the local management of the equipment (connettore LCT).

Parameter not meaningful for the elements which identify the Gateway. Distance. Metric value of the destination. Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the equipment and destination IP network or element: •

Connected. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software according to their own IP address and NetMask.

•

Static. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the user (static element).

Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Add. Add an element to the Routing Table. Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table. See also

Routing Table (command)

206

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

TDM Tributaries

E1. It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

207

E1 User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary. Operations

Verify the status and configuration of the E1s Modify the label of an E1 Activate/deactivate the E1 use Activate/deactivate the E1 loops Modify the management status of LOS alarm GUI

E1 contextual area

Verify the status and configuration of the E1s User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1. The E1 contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the E1.

Modify the label of an E1 User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1. The Tributary column displays the label of each tributary. 2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of maximum 40 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Activate/deactivate the E1 use User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1. The Enable column displays the tributary use status. 2. To modify the tributary use status, select the relevant box and then the option: •

Disable. The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.

•

Enable. The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the alarms.

Press Enable All to set the Enable value for all the tributaries. Press Disable All to set the Disable value for all the tributaries. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

208

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

If the tributary is enabled and you are disabling it, the message Do you want Los Inversion enable? is displayed. Pressing: •

Yes, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

•

No, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

Activate/deactivate the E1 loops User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1. The column: •

Line Loop indicates the loop status on line side for every single tributary: Line Loop Enabled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).

•

Internal Loop indicates the loop status on internal side for every single tributary: Int. Loop Enabled (loop active), ---- (loop inactive).

2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the option: •

Disable, to disable the loop.

•

Enable, to enable the loop.

The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled. 3. Press Apply. If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing a forcing and the current setting of the timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated.

Modify the management status of LOS alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the tributary is disabled.

1. Select Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1. The Los Inversion column displays the management status of LOS alarm. 2. To modify the management status of LOS alarm, select the relevant box and then the option: •

Los inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

•

No Los Inversion. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

209

E1 contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The context displays the status and the configuration of the 2Mbit/s tributaries. Table

Every table row corresponds to a tributary. The first row of the box refers to the first tributary of TDM module (E1-1), the second row to the second tributary of TDM module (E1-2) and so on up to 16th row representing the last tributary of the TDM module. For each tributary, the following parameters are reported: Tributary. Tributary label. Enable. Tributary use status: •

Disable (white box). Tributary not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the Los Inversion box.

•

Enable (green box). Tributary active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the alarms.

Line Loop. Line side loop status: •

Line Loop Enabled (green box). Line loop active.

•

---- (white box). Loop not active.

Internal Loop. internal side loop status: •

Int. Loop Enabled (green box). Internal loop active.

•

---- (white box). Loop not active.

Los Inversion. Management of LOS alarm when the tributary is not used: •

Los inversion (green box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

•

--- (white box). The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.

The status of the Los Inversion box is meaningful only if the tributary is not used. LOS Alarm / AIS Alarm. The colour of box indicates the status of the relevant alarm: •

White (no wording). The alarm is not active.

•

Red, orange, yellow or light blue (LOS or AIS wording). The alarm is active and has severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Enable All. Set the Enable value (Enable column) for all E1s. Disable All. Set the Disable value (Enable column) for all E1s. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

E1 (command) Modify the label of an E1 Activate/deactivate the E1 use Activate/deactivate the E1 loops Modify the management status of LOS alarm

210

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Cross Connection User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix. Operations

Display the connections of the equipment Execute a Tributary-Radio connection Execute a Radio-Radio connection Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection Delete one or more connections Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) GUI

Cross Connection contextual area See also

Cross connection matrix (info)

Display the connections of the equipment User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. The Cross Connection contextual area displays the list of all the cross connection.

Execute a Tributary-Radio connection User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) with at least one Radio Link defined and a value of permanent Radio E1 channels different from zero.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. 2. Press Add. 3. Set, un the Name box, the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters). 4. Set the first endpoint of the connection (1st End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the PPI option (tributary stream). b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 channel. The options in grey are not available because already used for another connection. 5. Set the second endpoint of the connection (2nd End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the Radio- option. b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 Radio channel. 6. Press Ok and confirm. When the message Operation done, want to create another cross-connection is displayed, press: •

Yes to open the Add X Connection window again for the creation of a new connection.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

211

•

No to return to context Cross Connection.

Execute a Radio-Radio connection User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) with at least one Radio Link defined and a value of permanent Radio E1 channels different from zero.

It is possible to create a connection between two channels of two different radio streams or of the same radio stream. 1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. 2. Press Add. 3. Set, un the Name box, the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters). 4. Set the first endpoint of the connection (1st End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the Radio- option. b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 Radio channel. The options in grey are not available because already used for another connection. 5. Set the second endpoint of the connection (2nd End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the Radio- option. b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 Radio channel. 6. Press Ok and confirm. When the message Operation done, want to create another cross-connection is displayed, press: •

Yes to open the Add X Connection window again for the creation of a new connection.

•

No to return to context Cross Connection.

Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. 2. Press Add. 3. Set, un the Name box, the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters). 4. Set the first endpoint of the connection (1st End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the PPI option (tributary stream). b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 channel. The options in grey are not available because already used for another connection. 5. Set the second endpoint of the connection (2nd End Point area): a. Select, in the Carrier box, the PPI option (tributary stream). b. Select, in the Time Slot box, an available E1 channel. 6. Press Ok and confirm. When the message Operation done, want to create another cross-connection is displayed, press:

212

•

Yes to open the Add X Connection window again for the creation of a new connection.

•

No to return to context Cross Connection.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. 2. Set, un the Name box, the name to be assigned to the connection (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 32 characters). 3. Activate the Loop Back option. 4. In the 1st End Point area, select in the Carrier box the stream (PPI or Radio...) and in the Time Slot box the unused channel for which you wish to execute the auto-loop. 5. Press Ok and confirm. When the message Operation done, want to create another cross-connection is displayed, press: •

Yes to open the Add X Connection window again for the creation of a new connection.

•

No to return to context Cross Connection.

Delete one or more connections User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Cross Connection. 2. Select the connection you wish to delete. The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. 3. Press Remove and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

213

Cross Connection contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The contextual area shows the connections of the equipment. Table

Every table row corresponds to a connection. For each connection, the following parameters are reported: Name. Name of the connection. Type. Type of connection: •

Unprotected. Tributary-Radio connection, Radio-Radio connection or Tributary-Tributary connection.

•

Loopback. Loop of channel on itself.

1st End and 2nd End. Channels composing the connection: •

PPI E1-. E1 channel of the TDM module.

•

Radio- E1-. High priority Radio E1 channel (Permanent) of the specific radio direction.

Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction of the connection (1st End -> 2nd End) only for clarity of explanation. The column 2nd End is not meaningful for the loops. When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow with the tip upwards is displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow with the tip downwards is displayed) an so on. Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Add. Execute a Tributary-Radio connection, Execute a Radio-Radio connection, Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection, Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop). Remove. Delete one or more connections. See also

Cross Connection (command) Cross connection matrix (info)

214

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Cross connection matrix (info) For AGS-20 equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9), a matrix is available for the cross-connection of the E1 channels of the tributaries to the high-priority Radio E1 channels (Permanent) of every radio direction. Connection Type

The TDM matrix manages the following types of unprotected connection: Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary E1 channel and a Radio E1. Radio-Radio. Single connection between two different E1 Radio channels. Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary E1 channels. Loop. Loop of a tributary E1 channel a Radio E1 channel on itself. The connections involving a Radio E1 are available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) with at least one Radio Link defined and a value of the permanent Radio e1 channels different from zero. E1 channels

Port

Stream

Configuration E1 of the TDM module

Availability

PPI

E1 (2Mbit/s)

Always available

Radio

x E1 ODU A (high priority E1 x = Value of the PermaRadio channels) nent TDM Traffic parameter (ODU A)

Port/channels available for equipment with Radio module, with Radio Link in 1+0 or 1+1 configuration and the value x greater than 0

Radio-A

x E1 ODU A (high priority E1 x = Value of the PermaRadio channels) nent TDM Traffic parameter (ODU A)

Port/channels available for equipment with Radio module, with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration or two Radio Link in 1+0 configuration (equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration) and the value x greater than 0

Radio-B

y E1 ODU B (high priority E1 y = Value of the PermaRadio channels) nent TDM Traffic parameter (ODU B)

Port/channels available for equipment with Radio module, with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration or two Radio Link in 1+0 configuration (equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W configuration) and the value y greater than 0

Cross-connection management

All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user. The user can display the cross-connections existing in equipment via GUI (WEB LCT and/or WEB CT). For each connection the name, the edge channels and the connection type are pointed out. In any moment the user can delete one or more cross-connections. If the user performs one of the following operations, the system automatically removes the connections ending on the (tributary or stream) stream subject of the change: •

Configuration change of the Radio Link (see Radio Configurator).

•

Configuration change of the high priority E1 Radio channels (see BW & Mod./Link ID - Permanent TDM Traffic).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

215

Tab.9 TDM module configuration Equipment type *

TDM Module

TDM interface (E1)

TDM matrix

AGS-20 Switch

-

-

-

AGS-20 Single-IF

-

-

-

AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1

x

x

x

AGS-20 Dual-IF

-

-

-

AGS-20 Dual-IF 16xE1

x

x

x

* See Verify the equipment units x Option available. - Option not available. See also

Cross Connection (command) Cross Connection contextual area Execute a Tributary-Radio connection Execute a Radio-Radio connection Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection Execute a Tributary-Radio connection Delete one or more connections

216

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

SYNCHRONISATION User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism Operations

T0

SYNCHRONISM

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism Force the status of the T0 synchronisation Set the Hold Off Time parameter Set the WTR Time parameter Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism SYNCHRONISM

SOURCES

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source Modify the use priority of a synchronism source Force the use of a synchronism source Set a synchronism source as preferential Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1 Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time Verify/modify the management of SSM messages Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation GUI

Synchronisation contextual area See also

Synchronisation (info)

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

217

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Synchronisation. The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism: •

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

•

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

•

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 3. Press Apply. Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set the Hold Off Time parameter User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a valid signal. 2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the WTR Time parameter User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism. 2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing Synk Loss Alarm):

218

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

•

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60 seconds). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING This operation can be executed only if the Sync Quality management functionality is enabled (see Equipment Features tab).

1. Select Synchronisation. The parameter Status indicates the status of use of the source quality level as criterion to select the synchronism: •

On. Use enabled.

•

Off. Use disabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Before disabling the synchronisation management (all the sources Dis.), it is suggested to temporarily force the status of synchronism T0 to Free Running (and then reset it to Locked) to avoid the occurrence of the alarms BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm and BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation).

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The Priority column displays the management of synchronisation: •

If all the sources are disabled (value Dis.), the synchronisation management has been disabled (the clocks are generated by the internal local reference).

•

If at least one source is enabled, the synchronisation management is enabled.

3. To change the management to Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source.

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The tab displays the status and configuration of the synchronism sources.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

219

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The Priority column shows the usage status of each source. 3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to assign to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority). To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the use priority of a synchronism source User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The Priority column shows the priority level of each source. 3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority). Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the use of a synchronism source User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active. 1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source. 3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option: •

Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

•

On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes. Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 5. Confirm the operation. The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

220

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Set a synchronism source as preferential User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential. 3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the option: •

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.

•

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The box Source of the row T3 SYNCH indicates the type of source currently in use: •

2Mb/s. Tributary with 2Mb/s interface.

•

2MHz. Tributary with 2MHz interface.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option. WARNING The selected source must correspond to the real signal in input to the equipment. A wrong configuration (2Mb/s instead of 2MHz or vice versa) will cause a fleeting alarm.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changed executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The box Source of the row TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B indicates the LAN of the Ethernet Switch currently in use for every specific source: LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4, LAN 5, LAN 6. 3. To change the parameter, select the wished option in the box. A value set for the source TE SyncE A will not be available for source TE SyncE B and vice versa. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changed executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

221

Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1 User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. The box Source of the row T2 E1 indicates E1 currently in use for the source: Trib.1 ÷ Trib.16. The wording None indicates that no tributary is selected as synchronism source. 3. To change the parameter, select the wished option in the box. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changed executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in transmission. 3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option: •

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the SSM is DNU (see Quality of synchronism source).

•

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

•

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

•

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

•

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the T0 tab. 3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 synchronism. 4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.

222

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is considered elapsed.

Verify/modify the management of SSM messages User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the LAN SSM tab. The tab shows the configuration parameters and the enabling status of the SSM messages (Synchronization Status Message) for the LAN interfaces. 3. To change the management of the SSM messages, in the SSM Enable box in corresponding of the wished LAN, select the option: •

On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.

•

Off. The messages are not managed.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface.

Operation available only for the LAN’s not selected as synchronisation sources and for the LAN’s selected as synchronisation sources which the use of SSM messages is not active for. When one LAN is selected as synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role of the line synchronism is dynamically managed by the system. 1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the 1000Base-T Role tab. The tab shows the configuration parameters and the line synchronism direction for the LAN with electrical interface. 3. To modify the direction of a LAN, select the relevant box in the Role column and then one of the following option: •

Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

•

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

•

Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM independently from the setting of the port parameters.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, is enabled.

Operation meaningful only for framed E1 (2Mbit/s).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

223

1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the Sa Bit tab. The T3 SYNC box indicates the spare bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T3 SYNC. Parameter meaningful only if the T3 SYNC source is configured with 2Mb/s interface. The T2 E1 box indicates the spare bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T2 E1. Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9) 3. To change a parameter, set the wished value in the relevant box: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1’s of equipment is described. For the correct configuration of the functionality for a Radio Link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation. 1. Select Synchronisation. 2. Select the E1 Retiming tab. The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1 equipment tributary. Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column: •

Name. Label of E1 tributary.

•

E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:

•

•

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

•

On. The E1 re-timing function is active.

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated). The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then the wished option. Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed. 4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

224

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Synchronisation contextual area The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism. Tabs

General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 synchronism. T0 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources. LAN SSM tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LAN’s. 1000Base-T Role tab. Role of the LAN synchronism sources. Sa Bit tab. Configuration of the spare bits for the sources T2 E1 and T3 SYNC. E1 Retiming tab. Retiming of E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Synchronisation (command) Synchronisation (info)

General tab The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism. Parameters

ALARMS Alarms status of the T0 synchronism. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

SETTING Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism: •

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

•

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

•

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

TIME Hold Off Time. Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a valid signal. WTR Time. Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism. LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time. Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm): •

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

225

•

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

QUALITY Current. Current quality level of the T0 synchronism: •

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the SSM is DNU (see Quality of synchronism source).

•

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

•

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

•

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

•

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Generally the quality of T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the source from which T0 is retrieved. Read only parameter. Status. Status of use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the synchronism: •

On. Use enabled.

•

Off. Use not enabled.

See also

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation Set the Hold Off Time parameter Set the WTR Time parameter Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism

T0 tab The tab displays the Configuration and status of the synchronism T0. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one source for which are indicated: Name. Synchronism source name: •

Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM 3e).

•

T3 SYNC. Source extracted from the synchronism port SYNC (2Mb/s or 2MHz).

•

TE SyncE A. First source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 ÷ LAN 6).

•

TE SyncE B. Second source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 ÷ LAN 6).

•

T2 E1. Source extracted from one of the equipment E1 tributaries. Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

•

ODU/LAN A. Source extracted from the Radio A interface.

•

ODU/LAN B. Source extracted from the Radio B interface. Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

ODU/LAN C. Source extracted from the LAN C interface.

•

ODU/LAN D. Source extracted from the LAN D interface.

Read only parameter.

226

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Source. Type of source used as synchronism: •

2Mb/s. 2Mb/s signal on SYNC connector (RJ45).

•

2MHZ. 2MHz signal on SYNC connector (RJ45).

•

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4, LAN 5, LAN 6. LANs of the Ethernet switch. LAN 1 and LAN 2 are available both when are configured as electrical and optical interface.

•

Trib. . E1 tributary (2Mb/s interface).

•

None. No tributary is selected as synchronism source.

Priority. Status and priority use of the source: •

Dis. The synchronism source is not used.

•

. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).

WARNING If all the sources are disabled, the synchronisation management is disabled.

Forced Switch. Forced use of the source: •

Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 synchronism.

•

On . The source has been manually forced for the generation of the T0 synchronism (Manual Operation).

Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source: •

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.

•

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation of the synchronism.

Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Read only parameter. Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception: •

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

•

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

•

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

•

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

•

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

The wording (ovw) indicates that the quality level in reception is forced by the operator. For the source T3 SYNC, if the set interface is 2MHz, the quality level in reception is not inserted into the transmitted signal; if the set interface is 2Mb/s, it is possible to manage the spare bit for the indication of the received quality (see Sa Bit tab). Read only parameter. Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission. The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter. Read only parameter. Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the source quality level in reception: •

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

227

•

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

•

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

•

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

•

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown

•

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the SSM messages i enabled or, for the sources that do not use the SSM is DNU (see Quality of synchronism source).

Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source. The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter. The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled. The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts the synchronization T0 from. When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border. Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time. See also

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source Modify the use priority of a synchronism source Force the use of a synchronism source Set a synchronism source as preferential Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1 Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source

LAN SSM tab WARNING Tab available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is en-

abled. The tab shows the enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LAN’s. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to a LAN for which are indicated: Port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of the slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port. •

228

LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third Ethernet line port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth Ethernet line port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth Ethernet line port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth Ethernet line port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh Ethernet line port (optical)

•

LAN D. Eighth Ethernet line port (optical).

Read only parameter. Media. Type of interface: •

Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.

•

Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.

•

---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (for example, Radio port).

•

Combo (...). Ethernet port with interface programmable by the user: electrical or optical. The type of set interface is indicated in brackets: •

(Copper): electrical interface.

•

(Fiber): optical interface.

Read only parameter. SSM Enable. Management status of the SSM messages for the equipment LAN’s: •

On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.

•

Off. The messages are not managed.

Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception: •

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

•

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

•

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

•

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

•

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

For the source T3 SYNC, if the set interface is 2MHz, the quality level in reception is not inserted into the transmitted signal; if the set interface is 2Mb/s, it is possible to manage the spare bit for the indication of the received quality (see Sa Bit tab). Read only parameter. Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission. The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter. Rx Pkts. Number of packets received on the corresponding port. Read only parameter. Tx Pkts. Number of packets transmitted by the corresponding port. Read only parameter. Rx Dropped Packets. Number of packets dropped among those received on the corresponding port. Read only parameter. Rx Errored Packets. Number of errored packets among those received on the corresponding port. Read only parameter. Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

229

Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. See also

Verify/modify the management of SSM messages

1000Base-T Role tab WARNING The parameters are not meaningful for the LAN’s with electrical interface which:

•

Are not selected as synchronism sources.

•

Are selected as synchronism sources for which the use of SSM messages is not active.

When one LAN is selected as synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role of the line synchronism is dynamically managed by the system. The tab displays the direction of the line synchronism for the LAN’s with electrical interface. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to a LAN for which are indicated: Port. Identifier of the port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of the slot number and the port number (slot number/port number). Read only parameter. Description. Name of the port: •

LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical).

•

LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical).

•

LAN 3. Third Ethernet line port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth Ethernet line port (electrical).

Read only parameter. Media. Type of interface: •

Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.

•

Combo (Copper). Ethernet port with electrical interface.

Read only parameter. Role. Line synchronism direction for the LAN’s with electrical interface displayed in the table: •

Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

•

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

•

Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM independently from the setting of the port parameters.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. See also

Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

230

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Sa Bit tab WARNING Tab available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, is

enabled. The tab shows the management of quality values for T3 SYNC and E1 T2 sources. Parameters

T3 SYNC. Spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T3 SYNC (Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8). Parameter meaningful only if the T3 SYNC source is configured with 2Mb/s interface. T2 E1. Spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T2 E1 (Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8). Parameter available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). See also

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources

E1 Retiming tab WARNING Tab available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9)

The tab shows the parameters to re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to an E1 for which are indicated: Name. Label of E1 tributary: ppi_. Read only parameter. E1 Retiming. Status of the E1 re-timing function of the tributary: •

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

•

On. The E1 re-timing function è active.

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated). The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated associated respectively to the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated associated to the Status severity level.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Read only parameter. Push-button

Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. See also

Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

231

Synchronisation (info)

Management of synchronisation Synchronism sources Enabling of the synchronism sources Priority of the synchronism source Quality of synchronism source Forcing of a synchronism source Function of preferential synchronism source Internal synchronism T0 Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation See also

Synchronisation (command) Synchronisation contextual area

Management of synchronisation AGS-20 equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled. When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the local internal reference. When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active). The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Verify/modify the management of synchronisation).

Synchronism sources The equipment has more synchronism sources: Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM 3e). T3 SYNC. Source extracted from the synchronism port SYNC (2Mb/s or 2MHz). TE SyncE A. First source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 ÷ LAN 6). TE SyncE B. Second source extracted from one of the LAN interface (LAN 1 ÷ LAN 6). T2 E1. Source extracted from one of the equipment E1 tributaries. Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). ODU/LAN A. Source extracted from the Radio A interface. ODU/LAN B. Source extracted from the Radio B interface. Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4). ODU/LAN C. Source extracted from the LAN C interface. ODU/LAN D. Source extracted from the LAN D interface.

Enabling of the synchronism sources A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source).

232

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Priority of the synchronism source A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism source). The source with the highest priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential source is not active). The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates the highest priority and 9 the lowest one. Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately lower. When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference. The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions: •

The source is not physically present.

•

The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3e) is greater than ± 7 ppm.

If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular and not Revertive list.

Quality of synchronism source Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level. When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing is not active). The quality level of one source is contained in the Synchronisation Status Messages (SSM). These messages are periodically transmitted; the absence of a message is considered as condition of failure of the synchronisation mechanism. The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below: •

PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

•

SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITUT G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

•

SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the synchronism local units.

•

SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages changes as pointed out here below. Synchronism sources TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B (Ethernet)

The technology Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) allows converting Ethernet into a synchronous network through the transmission of the frequency information over the physical level. It allows a master-slave synchronisation architecture, where the time information is transferred port to port by the physical level. The selection of the roles of Master and Slave takes place through the transmission of SSM messages. The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN. For the synchronism sources TE SyncE A and TE SyncE B, the quality management depends on the LAN interface and by the management of the SSM messages as indicated here below.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

233

SSM messages management

LAN configuration LAN with electrical interface used as synchronism source **

LAN with optical interface used as synchronism source **

Line synchronism direction (role) * Role dynamically managed by the system

Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from the considered LAN) is inpacket serted in the transmitted packet.

Disable

Role set by operator ***

Quality value is DNU

-

Disable

LAN with optical interface not used as synchronism source

Quality management in output (Tx)

Enable

Enable

LAN with electrical interface not used as synchronism source

Quality management in input (Rx)

-

SSM messages are not transmitted

Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from the considered LAN) is inpacket serted in the transmitted packet. Quality value is DNU

SSM messages are not transmitted

Enable

Role set by operator ***

SSM messages are not managed

Quality value of T0 is inserted in the transmitted packet

Disable

Role set by operator ***

SSM messages are not managed

SSM messages are not transmitted

SSM messages are not managed

Quality value of T0 is inserted in the transmitted packet

SSM messages are not managed

SSM messages are not transmitted

Enable Disable

-

* Parameter meaningful only for LAN with 1000Base-T electrical interface. ** LAN connected to the TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B input (see Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B). *** See Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

Synchronism sources ODU/LAN x

For the synchronism source ODU/LAN x, the quality management depends on the management of SSM messages as indicated here below. Synchronism sources ODU/LAN ODU/LAN ODU/LAN ODU/LAN

A B* C D

SSM messages management

Quality management in input (Rx)

Quality management in output (Tx)

Enable

Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from the considered LAN) is inpacket serted in the transmitted packet.

Disable

Quality value is DNU

SSM messages are not transmitted

* Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

Synchronism sources T2 E1 (E1 tributary) WARNING Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

For the synchronism sources T2 E1, the management of the quality depends on the E1 re-timing function as displayed here below.

234

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Synchronism sources

E1 re-timing function

T2 E1

Quality management in out- Quality management in input put (Tx) (Rx)

Enable

Quality value of T0 is insert- Quality value (SSM) is exed in the spare bits * tracted from the spare bits

Disable

Quality not managed **

* Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary. ** Value UNK. Synchronism sources T3 SYNC

For the synchronism sources T3 SYNC, the management of the quality depends on the interface type as displayed here below. Synchronism sources T3 SYNC

Interface

Quality management in out- Quality management in input put (Tx) (Rx)

2Mb/s

Quality value of T0 is insert- Quality value (SSM) is exed in the spare bits * tracted from the spare bits

2MHz

Quality not managed **

* Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary. ** Quality value not inserted in the transmitted signal. WEB LCT

As regards the quality management via the GUI, it is possible: Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source Verify/modify the management of SSM messages Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality management equipment feature).

If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available (see Verify the equipment feature).

Forcing of a synchronism source This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a synchronism source). This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source. This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).

Function of preferential synchronism source This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a synchronism source as preferential). When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled source with highest priority.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

235

When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its priority level. This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source signal becomes degraded.

Internal synchronism T0 The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS of the equipment according to the following order of criteria: •

Status of the source (enabled/disabled)

•

Forcing of the source

•

Status of the signal (valid/degraded)

•

Preferential source

•

Source priority

The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses: •

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

•

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

•

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation). The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0. These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation WARNING Function available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM). Generally, the tributaries of equipment TDM module transport traffic. If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example. Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.4). Fig.4 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation) LOCAL equipment

REMOTE equipment

SETS management

SETS management

Tributary 1

236

Tributary 1

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of GUI: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Verify/modify the management of synchronisation). b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1). c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2 E1 (see Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1). d. Set the source T2 E1 as synchronism source (see Synchronisation). Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of GUI: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Verify/modify the management of synchronisation). b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1). c. Set the source ODU/LAN A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation). For equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration, set the source ODU/LAN A or ODU/ LAN B depending on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected. d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (see Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation). WARNING In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on more E1, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

237

RADIO WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined.

Radio Branch. It manages the radio parameters.

238

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Branch User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 or 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the Radio Branch command. For the configurations 1+1 Hot Standby or 2+0 XPIC, the parameters present in the context refer both to ODU A and ODU B. For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1 Frequency Diversity or in 2x(1+0) radio configuration the commands Radio Branch ODU A (ODU A parameters) and Radio Branch ODU B (ODU B parameters) are present. The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters. Operations

Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq) Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq) Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions) Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions) Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control) Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx) Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation) Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx) Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile GUI

Radio Branch contextual area

Verify/modify the duplex frequency User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. The Dplx Freq parameter indicates the duplex frequency (MHz) of the equipped radio. The displayed value is always positive, independently from the position of the transmission frequency with respect to the receiving frequency. 2. To change the parameter, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Setting the parameter does NOT automatically modify even the RF frequency of remote equip-

ment. Before setting the transmission frequency of the equipment, set the duplex frequency value. 1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. The Tx Freq parameter indicates the transmission frequency of the equipment. 2. To change the parameter, it is possible to: •

Set in the Tx Freq box the wished frequency value using the fine tuning step (typically 125 KHz).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

239

•

Press Freq. Table to display the table of the frequencies (see ITU-R F2006). Select the wished value and press Ok. If this value was not present in the table, the radio can be however tuned with fine tuning. Push-button available only if the channelling file has been previously loaded on the equipment. In case of fine-step file (less than 1 MHz), the frequency table does not contain any value to avoid reading not meaningful values.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. The Prx: dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change). 2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. The Ptx: dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change). 2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. 2. Select the ODU Powers tab. The Tx Power Control area indicates the functioning status of the ATPC: •

Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable). In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).

•

Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode. In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the signal at reception. The thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

240

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Asymmetrical configuration of the Radio Link between local and remote equipment, as regards

the value of Ptx / modulation, are not supported. 1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. 2. Select the ODU Powers tab. The Max Ptx: dBm parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nominal value). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. If you wish to set the maximum value of available range, activate the box ATPC Full Range. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. 2. Select the ODU Powers tab. The ATPC Regulation: dB parameter indicates the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range. 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. 2. Select the ODU Powers tab. In the ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area the threshold of the ATPC is pointed out: •

High: dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold value.

•

Low: dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.

3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value. 4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

241

Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Radio > Radio Branch. 2. Select the ODU Powers tab. In the Current Power area the table resuming the power in transmission for every ACM profile is displayed. Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column: •

Active Modulation. ACM profile

•

Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter Values of minimum power available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic.

•

ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. Minimum threshold (Min) and maximum threshold (Max) of ATPC device. Values available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic.

Press Refresh to update the table.

242

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Branch contextual area WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0, 1+1 or 2+0 XPIC configuration is present the Radio Branch command. For the configurations 1+1 Hot Standby or 2+0 XPIC, the parameters present in the context refer both to ODU A and ODU B. For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1 Frequency Diversity or in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) EW radio configuration there are the commands Radio Branch ODU A (which opens the context area Radio Branch ODU A containing the radio parameters of ODU A) and Radio Branch ODU B (which opens the context area Radio Branch ODU B containing the radio parameters of ODU B). The contextual area displays the radio parameters. Tabs

ODU Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, power resolution. ODU Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC. Push-button

Apply. Confirms the changes. Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Opens the help on-line. See also

Radio Branch (command)

ODU Settings tab The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions). Parameters

TX FREQUENCY SELECTOR Tx Freq. Frequency of the radio transmission. The wording: •

Must be Set indicates that for the radio a channel is not planned.

•

HW Fail indicates a hardware problem.

Dplx Freq. Frequency of duplex. MEASUREMENTS RESOLUTION Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change). For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12. Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change). For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx value corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value -68. Push-button

Freq. Table. Display the table of the preferential frequencies. See also

Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

243

Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq) Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions) Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)

ODU Powers tab The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC). Parameters

TX POWER CONTROL Operating status of the ATPC device: •

Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).

•

Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.

Max Ptx dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic one. ATPC Regulation dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range. Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value) and the box ATPC Full Range is not active. ATPC Full Range. The active box ( ) indicates that the ATPC device operates at the maximum limit of the range; the inactive box indicates that the maximum limit of the ATPC device is indicated by the parameter ATPC Regulation. Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value). ATPC THRESHOLDS

ON

LOCAL PRX

High: dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold value Low: dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value. CURRENT POWER The table resuming the power in transmission for every ACM profile. Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column: Active Modulation. ACM profile. Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter Values of minimum power available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic. ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. Minimum threshold (Min) and maximum threshold (Max) of ATPC device. Values available only if the parameter Tx Power Control has value Automatic. Table available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled. Push-button

Refresh. Updates the table. See also

Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control) Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx) Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation) Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)

244

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

MAINTENANCE

S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N). PRBS. It manages the PRBS device. Radio Loop & Cmd. It manages the radio loops. Manual Operations. It manages the manual operations. PSU Alarm Config.. It manages the Power Supply Unit alarms. Radio Switch. It manages the radio switch. RMON. It manages the count of the RMon statistics.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

245

S/N Meas User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration is present the S/N Meas command. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration are present the S/N Meas ODU A (branch A S/N measure) and S/N Meas ODU B (branch B S/N measure) commands. The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the quality of the radio communication channel. Operations

Verify the value of the S/N measure Update the value of the S/N measure GUI

S/N Meas. contextual area

Verify the value of the S/N measure User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas. The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.

Update the value of the S/N measure User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas. The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio. 2. Press Refresh to update the value.

246

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

S/N Meas. contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined.

For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration the S/N Meas command is available which opens the S/N Meas contextual area. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) EW radio configuration the commands S/N Meas ODU A, which opens the S/N Meas ODU A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to S/N measure of branch A, and S/N Meas ODU B, which opens the S/N Meas ODU B contextual area containing the parameters relevant to S/N measure of branch B, are available. The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure. Parameters

S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio. The measure is always in progress. Push-button

Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure Help. Open the help on-line. See also

S/N Meas (command)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

247

PRBS User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The PRBS command manages the PRBS device. Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure Activate/reset the PRBS measure Deactivate the PRBS measure Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure GUI

PRBS contextual area

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS. The PRBS contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure.

Activate/reset the PRBS measure User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS. 2. Select the Start-Reset option (Start/Stop parameter). 3. Press Apply and confirm. The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.

Deactivate the PRBS measure User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS. 2. Select the Stop option (Start/Stop parameter). 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS. The Test Pattern parameter indicates the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure.

248

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.

•

2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.

•

2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Maintenance > PRBS. The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (1÷16). The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate by means of the PRBS functionality.

•

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.

3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box. 4. Press Apply and confirm. Only if the Enable option is selected a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immediately enabled to the use and then a message warns you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout. 5. Confirm the operation. Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

249

PRBS contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure. Parameters

GENERAL BER. Dynamically updated BER value during the measure Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in day/hours/minutes/seconds) range after the measure active Fail Alarms (option). Number of times that the Fail Alarm activated from the start of the measure. Fail Alarm (box). Status of the Fail Alarm. The colour of the box represents the alarm status and severity: •

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

•

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

•

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Start/Stop. Activation status of the measure: •

Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.

•

Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.

Test Pattern. Type of pattern used for the measure: •

Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.

•

2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.

•

2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.

E1 Signal. Status of the E1 signal used for the measure: •

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (1÷16).

•

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.

2Mbit/s Selection. Tributary used for the measure. Parameter meaningful only if the Enable option (E1 Signal parameter) is active. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

PRBS (command) Activate/reset the PRBS measure Deactivate the PRBS measure Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure

250

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Loop & Cmd User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one

Radio Link defined. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Loop & Cmd command. For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration are present the Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A (ODU A radio parameters) and Radio Loop & Cmd ODU B (ODU B radio parameters) commands. The Radio Loop & Cmd command manages the radio loops, the transmitter operating status, the RT PSU operating status and the carrier modulation. Operations

Verify the radio loops status Activate a radio loop Deactivate a radio loop Execute the test (RF Loop) Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier GUI

Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area See also

Test RF Loop (info)

Verify the radio loops status User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. The Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.

Activate a radio loop User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic.

The activation of a radio loop ...(traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of the local and remote supervision. For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC: •

The activation of a loop disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

•

The activation of a Loop IF... switches the remote transmitter off.

•

The activation of a Loop RF... can be disturbed by the cross-polarization signal.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of the equipment or the equipment reset.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

251

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. 2. In the Radio Loop area, select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate. It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables the preceding one. The presence of the box Test Loop Result indicates that the equipment is equipped with an ODU provided with Test RF (see Execute the test (RF Loop) and Test RF Loop (info). 3. Press Apply. A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.

Deactivate a radio loop User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. 2. In the Radio Loop area, select the Loop OFF option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Execute the test (RF Loop) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation available only for equipment provided with ODU’s supporting the Test. 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop. 2. Select the RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic squelched) or RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic not squelched) option. 3. Press Apply. A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. During the execution of the test, the Test Loop box shows the progression of the operation. The status of the test is pointed out by the Test Loop Result box: •

Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.

•

White box - wording Running. Test in progress.

•

Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).

•

Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).

•

Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system. Possible cause: the set timeout of the MAN OP is lower than the time for the execution of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test.

5. Select the Loop OFF option. 6. Press Apply and confirm.

252

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Switching the power supply off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the power supply disabled the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area). 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply: •

On. The RT power supply is on.

•

Off. The RT power supply is off.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 3. Press Apply. Only if you are switching off the RT (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Switching the transmitter off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a controller restart. For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the power supply disabled the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area). 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter: •

On. The transmitter is turned on.

•

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

•

Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 3. Press Apply. Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Deactivating the modulation (option On) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

Before deactivating the modulation, configure the transmitter power to the minimum value. For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the modulation: •

Disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

•

Could cause interference in reception.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

253

It is not advisable to perform the operation of Carrier Only on both branches. If it was however done, it will be necessary to deactivate the operation for both the branches in rapid succession. 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop & Cmd. The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier: •

On. The carrier is not modulated.

•

Off. The carrier is modulated.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. 3. Press Apply. Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.

254

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined.

For the equipment with Radio Link in 1+0 configuration the Radio Loop & Cmd command is available which opens the Radio Loop & Cmd contextual area. For the equipment with Radio Link in configuration 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration there are the commands Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A (which opens the context area Radio Loop & Cmd ODU A containing the radio parameters of ODU A) and Radio Loop & Cmd ODU B (which opens the context area Radio Loop & Cmd ODU B containing the radio parameters of ODU B). The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops, the transmitter operating status, the RT PSU operating status and the carrier modulation. Parameters

RADIO LOOP Loop. Status of the loops: •

Loop OFF. No loop active.

•

RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic squelched). RF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not looped.

•

IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not looped.

•

RF Loop at fixed modulation (traffic not squelched). RF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is looped.

•

IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is looped.

The RF Loop... values are available only if the RF loop is supported by the equipment hardware. When the RF loop is not available, the values RF Loop (traffic squelched) and RF Loop (traffic not squelched) are indicated. Test Loop Result. Progress and result of Test RF: •

Grey box - wording None. Test to execute.

•

White box - wording Running. Test in progress.

•

Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).

•

Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).

•

Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.

Parameter available only for equipment provided with ODU’s supporting the Test RF. RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply: •

On. The RT power supply is on.

•

Off. The RT power supply is off.

Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter: •

On. The transmitter is turned on.

•

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

•

Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier: •

On. The carrier is not modulated.

•

Off. The carrier is modulated.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

255

See also

Radio Loop & Cmd (command) Test RF Loop (info) Activate a radio loop Deactivate a radio loop Execute the test (RF Loop) Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier

256

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Test RF Loop (info) The AGS-20 equipment with ODU of new generation is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality, based on a loop executed in preset operating condition in such a way to verify the transceiver functionality. The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need any external measurement tools. At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed: test executed correctly (ODU operating), test failed (ODU faulted). The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual operations. If the timeout: •

Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in the specific procedure.

•

Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as described in the specific procedure.

If the test is interrupted by the system, a possible reason could be that the set timeout was lower than the execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test. In case of equipment wit Radio Link in: •

1+1 Hot Standby radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch involves the loss of the connection of the working branch, because the remote transmitter is switched off.

•

1+1 Freq. Div radio configuration systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch involves the degradation or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on this one the same modulation is (mandatory) set.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

257

Manual Operations User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Manual Operations command manages the available maintenance operations (MAN OP). Operations

Verify the manual operations status Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply Activate/deactivate a radio loop Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function Force the management of the switching in reception Force the management of the switching in transmission Force the status of the T0 synchronisation Force the use of a synchronism source Activate/deactivate the E1 loops Activate/reset the PRBS measure Deactivate the PRBS measure Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure GUI

Manual Operations contextual area

Verify the manual operations status User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Manual Operations contextual area displays the current status of the available maintenance operations.

Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Ra-

dio Link defined. Switching the transmitter off is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the Tx is on, independently from the previous setting. The permanent turn-off of the transmitter is not a maintenance operation, so the operation is not available in this context. To execute it see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter. For equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration, turn off the transmitter disables the XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area). 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:

258

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

On. The transmitter is turned on.

•

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

2. To turn-off the transmitter select the Off option, press Apply and confirm. 3. To turn-on the transmitter select the On option, press Apply and confirm.

Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Ra-

dio Link defined. Deactivating the modulation of the RF carrier is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC, switching off the modulation: •

Disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

•

Could cause interference in reception.

It is not advisable to perform the operation of Carrier Only on both branches. If it was however done, it will be necessary to deactivate the operation for both the branches in rapid succession. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier: •

On. The carrier is not modulated.

•

Off. The carrier is modulated.

2. To disable the modulation of the RF carrier select the On value, press Apply and confirm. 3. To enable the modulation of the RF carrier select the Off value, press Apply and confirm.

Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Ra-

dio Link defined. Switching the power supply off is a MAN. OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). For equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration, turn off the RT power supply disables the XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The RT PSU parameter indicates the operation of the RT power supply: •

On. The RT power supply is on.

•

Off. The RT power supply is off.

2. To turn-off the RT power supply select the Off option, press Apply and confirm. 3. To turn-on the RT power supply select the On option, press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

259

Activate/deactivate a radio loop User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Ra-

dio Link defined. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/ modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the loop is deactive independently from the previous setting. The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic. The activation of the radio loop IF Loop (traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of the local and remote supervision. For equipment with Radio Link in configuration 2+0 XPIC: •

The activation of a loop disables the XPIC Fault Management Procedure (FMP) (see Xpic contextual area).

•

The activation of a Loop IF... switches the remote transmitter off.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Radio Loop parameter indicates the status of the radio loops: •

Loop OFF. No loop active.

•

IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not looped.

•

IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is looped.

2. To activate a loop select the value relevant to the wished loop, press Apply and confirm It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables the preceding one. 3. To deactivate the loop select the Loop OFF value, press Apply and confirm.

Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration.

Disabling temporarily the XPIC function is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the XPIC function is active independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Xpic parameter indicates the status of the XPIC function: •

Enable. Function active.

•

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated.

2. To disable temporarily the XPIC function, select Disable, press Apply and confirm. 3. To restore the XPIC function, select Enable, press Apply and confirm.

Force the management of the switching in reception User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with radio Link in 1+1 HS and 1+1 FD configuration.

Forcing the switch is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting.

260

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Rx Forced parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception for the specific Link: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the Link).

•

ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

2. To force the management of the switching in reception, select ODU A or ODU B, press Apply and confirm. 3. To remove the forcing, select Auto, press Apply and confirm.

Force the management of the switching in transmission User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with radio Link in 1+1 HS configuration.

Forcing the switch is a MAN OP. The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Tx Forced parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission for the specific Link: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the equipment).

•

ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

2. To force the management of the switching in transmission, select ODU A or ODU B, press Apply and confirm. 3. To remove the forcing, select Auto, press Apply and confirm.

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout

setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism: •

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

•

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

•

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To force the status of the T0 synchronisation select the Free Running or Hold Over value, press Apply and confirm. 3. To remove the forcing select the Locked option, press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

261

Force the use of a synchronism source User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout

setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting. 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Forced Switch parameter indicates the forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of the T0 synchronism: •

Off. No source has been forced.

•

T3 SYNC. The system forces the use of the source extracted from RJ45 connector.

•

TE SyncE A. The system forces the use of the first source extracted from one of the Ethernet LAN interfaces.

•

TE SyncE B. The system forces the use of the second source extracted from one of the Ethernet LAN interfaces

•

T2 E1. The system forces the use of the source extracted from one of the E1 tributaries. Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

•

ODU/LAN A. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio A interface.

•

ODU/LAN B. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio B interface.

•

ODU/LAN C. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN C.

•

ODU/LAN D. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN D.

Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

2. To force a source select the specific option, press Apply and confirm. 3. To remove the forcing select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.

Activate/deactivate the E1 loops User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/ modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated. The activation of the loop on internal side is meaningful only if the relevant tributary is enabled (see Activate/deactivate the E1 use). 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The PPI Loop area indicates, for every E1, the status of the relevant loop. The first box indicates the loop status on line side: Line On (loop active), Line Off (loop inactive). The second box indicates the loop status on internal side: Internal On (loop active), Internal Off (loop inactive). 2. To modify the loop status, select the relevant box and then the wished option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

262

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Activate/reset the PRBS measure User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Start/Stop parameter indicates the status of the PRBS measure. 2. To activate or reset the measure, select the Start-Reset option. 3. Press Apply and confirm. WARNING The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.

Deactivate the PRBS measure User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The Start/Stop parameter indicates the status of the PRBS measure. 2. To deactivate the measure, select the Stop option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

The activation of the E1 signal is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout). If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the E1 signal is deactivated. The enabling of E1 signal is meaningful only if the PRBS parameters are configured and the measure is active (see Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure/Activate/reset the PRBS measure) and if the tributary set for the measure is enabled (see Activate/deactivate the E1 use). 1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations. The E1 Signal parameter indicates the status of the used E1 signal for the measure. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (1÷16). The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate by means of the PRBS functionality.

•

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

263

Manual Operations contextual area The contextual area shows the current status of the available maintenance operations (MAN OP). Press

to compress a group. Press

to expand a group.

Parameters

ODU-A

AND

ODU B

Areas available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with at least one Radio Link defined. The area relevant to the second ODU is available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1, 2+0 XPIC configuration or equipment in 2x(1+0) or 2x(1+0) E-W radio configuration. The following parameters are present in every area: Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter: •

On. The transmitter is turned on.

•

Off. The transmitter is turned off.

Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier: •

On. The carrier is not modulated.

•

Off. The carrier is modulated.

RT PSU. Operating status of the RT power supply: •

On. The RT power supply is on.

•

Off. The RT power supply is off.

Radio Loop. Status of the radio loops: •

Loop OFF. No loop active.

•

IF Loop (traffic squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is not looped.

•

IF Loop (traffic not squelched). IF loop active: traffic (Ethernet and TDM) is looped.

Xpic. Activation of XPIC function: •

Enable. Function active.

•

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated.

Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Link in 2+0 XPIC configuration. RADIO SWITCH

Area available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1 HS and 1+1 FD configuration. Rx Forced. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching at reception between the service branch and the reserve one: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.

•

ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

Tx Forced. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.

•

ODU A. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

ODU B. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

Parameter available only for equipment with Radio Link in 1+1 HS configuration. SYNCHRONISATION Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism:

264

•

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

•

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

Forced Switch. Forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of the T0 synchronism:

PPI

•

Off. No source has been forced.

•

T3 SYNC. The system forces the use of the source extracted from connector RJ45.

•

TE SyncE A. The system forces the use of the first source extracted from one of the Ethernet LAN interfaces.

•

TE SyncE B. The system forces the use of the second source extracted from one of the Ethernet LAN interfaces.

•

T2 E1. The system forces the use of the source extracted from one of the E1 tributaries. Source available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9).

•

ODU/LAN A. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio A interface.

•

ODU/LAN B. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Radio B interface. Source available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

ODU/LAN C. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN C.

•

ODU/LAN D. The system forces the use of the source extracted from the Ethernet interface LAN D.

LOOP

Area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). . Name of the E1 tributary. . Loop status on line side: •

Line On. Line side loop active.

•

Line Off. Line side loop inactive.

. Loop status on internal side: •

Internal On. Internal side loop active.

•

Internal Off. Internal side loop inactive.

PRBS Area available only for equipment with TDM module (see Tab.9). E1 Signal. Status of the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure: •

Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the TDM module (1÷16). The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate by means of the PRBS functionality.

•

Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.

Start/Stop. Activation status of the PRBS measure: •

Start-Reset. The measure is active.

•

Stop. The measure is deactivated.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Manual Operations (command) Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply Activate/deactivate a radio loop Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function Force the management of the switching in reception

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

265

Force the management of the switching in transmission Force the status of the T0 synchronisation Force the use of a synchronism source Activate/deactivate the E1 loops Activate/reset the PRBS measure Deactivate the PRBS measure Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure

266

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

PSU Alarm Config. User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The PSU Alarm Config. command manages the power supply alarms. Operations

Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm Enable/disable the PSU alarm GUI

PSU Alarm Config. contextual area

Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > PSU Alarm Config. The PSU Alarm Config. contextual area displays the enabling status of power supply alarms.

Enable/disable the PSU alarm User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The enabling of alarm PSU 1 and PSU 2 is subjected to the enabling status of the alarm pwrSup-

plyAlarm (IDU group) (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual area). If the alarm pwrSupplyAlarm is disabled, even the alarms PSU 1 and PSU 2 will be disabled even if they are set Enable in PSU Alarm Config. contextual area If the alarm pwrSupplyAlarm is enabled, the alarms PSU 1 and PSU 2 will be enabled or disabled depending on what set in the context area PSU Alarm Config. 1. Select Maintenance > PSU Alarm Config. 2. Set the PSU 1 Alarm parameter (first Power Supply module alarm) or PSU 2 Alarm parameter (second Power Supply module alarm) selecting: •

Enable, to enable the alarm. Enabling the alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected, this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history alarms.

•

Disable, to disable the alarm. Disabling the alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred.

For equipment type AGS-20 Switch, AGS-20 Single-IF, AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1 is available and meaningful only the PSU 1 Alarm parameter. 3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

267

PSU Alarm Config. contextual area The contextual area displays the enabling status of power supply alarms. Parameters

PSU 1 Alarm. Enabling status of the alarm relevant to the first module Power Supply: •

Enable. Alarm enabled.

•

Disable. Alarm disabled.

PSU 2 Alarm. Enabling status of the alarm relevant to the second module Power Supply: •

Enable. Alarm enabled.

•

Disable. Alarm disabled.

Parameter not available and meaningful for equipment type AGS-20 Switch, AGS-20 Single-IF, AGS-20 Single-IF 16xE1. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

PSU Alarm Config. (command) Enable/disable the PSU alarm

268

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Radio Switch WARNING Option available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in 1+1 configuration.

. It manages the switch of the specific Radio Link.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

269

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Command available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link in 1+1 configuration.

The command manages the switch of the specific Radio Link. Operations

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) Modify the Wait Time parameter Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration GUI

contextual area See also

Radio switch (info)

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . The contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switch of the specific Link.

Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . The Rx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in reception for the specific Link. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the Link).

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

3. Press Apply. Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Ch… option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting.

270

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type (1+1 Hot Standby).

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . The Tx Forced Switch parameter indicates the management of the switching in transmission for the specific Link. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the equipment).

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

3. Press Apply. Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Ch… option) a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then switched on again, the switch mode for the specific Link is automatic independently from the previous setting.

Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only for equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type (1+1 Hot Standby).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . The Tx Preferential parameter indicates the management of the preferential branch in transmission for the specific Link. 2. To change the parameter, select the option: •

Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 1 (ODU A).

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 2 (ODU B).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the Wait Time parameter User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if set a preferential branch the service at transmission (see Tx Prefer-

ential). 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . The Wait Time (m) parameter indicates the value of Wait Time. 2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 minutes.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

271

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation available only if set a preferential branch the service at transmission (see Tx Prefer-

ential). 1. Select Maintenance > Radio Switch > . 2. Press Reset and confirm

272

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

contextual area WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment with Radio module (see Tab.4) and with Radio Link

in 1+1 configuration. The contextual area shows the status and the configuration of the radio switch of the specific Link. Parameters

Rx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching at reception between the service branch and the reserve one: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

Tx Forced Switch. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the switching at transmission between the service branch and the reserve one: •

Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 (ODU A) for the service on the specific Link.

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 (ODU B) for the service on the specific Link.

PREFERENTIAL MANAGEMENT Tx Preferential. Mode used to manage, into the systems in 1+1 configuration, the function of preferential branch for the service at transmission: •

Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.

•

Ch 1 (ODU A). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 1 (ODU A).

•

Ch 2 (ODU B). Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 2 (ODU B).

Wait Time (m). Time period during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms. WARNING Tx Forced Switch, Tx Preferential and Wait Time parameters are available only for

equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration of isofrequential type (1+1 Hot Standby). For Radio Link in protected configuration of heterofrequential type (1+1 Frequency Diversity), the parameters are not available because the two branches (ODU A and ODU B) transmit at the same time because the selection of the signal is executed at reception. Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes. Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Reset. Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration See also

(command) Radio switch (info) Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) Modify the Wait Time parameter

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

273

Radio switch (info)

Management of the radio switch

The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the AGS-20 equipment with Radio Link in protected configuration, generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises on the operating radio branch (ODU). The user can manage the radio switch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential branch. Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)

This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can be active on Link (see Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)/Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmission. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set). Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)

This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there are not alarms that cause the switching on Link (see Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential). When the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on the branch on service there are present some specific alarms. When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the preferential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms). Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the nonpreferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms. For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on. In any moment the user can Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration.

274

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

RMON

Settings. It manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History). Ethernet Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port). Ethernet Service Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN). Ethernet History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances per Port). Ethernet Service History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

275

Settings User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Settings command manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History). Operations

Verify the count status of the RMon statistics Activate the count of the RMon statistics Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics STATISTICS

GROUP

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics HISTORY

GROUP

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics GUI

Settings contextual area See also

RMon standard (info)

Verify the count status of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. The parameter RMON Status shows the status of the count of the RMon statistics and the history of the RMon statistics for the all enabled instances: •

Enabled. The count is active.

•

Disabled. The count is not active.

Activate the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance has been set.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Enabled and confirm. The count of the RMon statistics is activated for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab, Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.

276

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The operation resets the current values of RMON statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Service Statistics) and the RMon statistic history (see Ethernet History and Ethernet Service History).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Disabled and confirm. The count of the RMon statistics is interrupted for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab, Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The recommended maximum number of RMon instances per Port is 10.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, press Add. 3. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535). It is not possible to set a value already present in list or in the tab Ethernet Service Statistics tab. 4. Set, in the Data source box, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the RMon statistics for the specific instance. The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

The list will display only the ports not associated yet to any RMon per Port instance. 5. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric string of 30 characters at most). Optional parameter. 6. Press Apply. The instance is added to the list. The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics).

Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

277

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, select the instance you wish to delete. An instance per Port cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the same Ethernet port is present in the Ethernet History tab. To delete it, it is first necessary to remove the instance per Port present in the tab Ethernet History. 3. Press Remove and confirm. The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The recommended maximum number of RMon instance for service (instances Port & Priority + instances Port & VLAN) is 64. Within this limit, a maximum number of 40 instances Port & VLAN is foresee.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab. 3. Press Add. 4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the port in the database table of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535). It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Statistics tab. 5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable to the count of RMon statistics for the specific instance. The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the port (alphanumeric string of 30 characters at most). Optional parameter. 7. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to enable to filter the traffic: •

Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output must have to be counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).

•

SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN). Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.

•

CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN). Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

8. Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service.

278

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

9. Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab). Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service. 10.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab). Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service. 11.Press Apply. The instance is added to the list. The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics).

Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab. 3. Select the instance you wish to delete. An instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the same criteria (Ethernet port and Priority or C-VID/S-VID) is present in the Ethernet Service History tab. In order to delete it, it is first necessary to delete the corresponding instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN present in the tab Ethernet Service History. 4. Press Remove and confirm. The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The total recommended maximum number of RMon instances for the count of the RMon statistics history is 74. The limit is for instances of 1 minute and 240 buckets.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet History tab. 3. Press Add. 4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535). It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Service History tab. 5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the RMon statistics for the specific instance. The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

279

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the RMon instance (alphanumeric string of 30 characters at most). Optional parameter. 7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240). The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. 8. Set, in Persistence box, the status of automatic storing of RMon statistics: •

Disable. Automatic storing inactive.

•

Enable. Automatic storing active.

9. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. If, in the previous step, the parameter Persistence has been set to: •

Disable, any value can be set, between 1 and 3600 seconds, as sampling interval.

•

Enable, one of the following values can be set: 60, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1800 or 3600 seconds.

The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds. 10.Press Apply. The message Ethernet Statistics for are not present, they will be created automatically? indicates that, for the Ethernet port selected at step 5, there is not an analogous instance in the Ethernet Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation. The instance is added to the list. The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics). In the Ethernet Statistics tab, an instance per Port is automatically created with the following characteristics: •

Index. First value Index free in the table of the current RMon statistics of the database.

•

Data Source and Owner. Respectively Ethernet port and user of the instance per Port just created for the count of the RMon statistics.

Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet History tab. 3. Select the instance you wish to delete. 4. Press Remove and confirm. The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING The total recommended maximum number of RMon instances for the count of the RMon statistics history is 74. The limit is for instances of 1 minute and 240 buckets.

280

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab. 3. Press Add. 4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535). It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in Ethernet History tab. 5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the RMon statistics for the specific instance. The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric string of 30 characters at most). Optional parameter. 7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240). The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. The recommended maximum value of bucket for all the instances is 2400. 8. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history. If, in the previous step, the parameter Persistence has been set to: •

Disable, any value can be set, between 1 and 3600 seconds, as sampling interval.

•

Enable, one of the following values can be set: 60, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1800 or 3600 seconds.

The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds. 9. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to use to filter the traffic: •

Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMON statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).

•

SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN). Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.

•

CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & VLAN). Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

10.Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service. 11.Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics. The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab). Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service. 12.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics. The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

281

Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service. 13.Press Apply. The message Ethernet Service Statistics for with is not present, will be created? indicates that, for the selected Ethernet port and priority or C-VIS/S-VID there is not an analogous instance in the Ethernet Service Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation. The instance is added to the list. The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics). In the tab Ethernet Service Statistics, an instance is automatically created with the following characteristics: •

Index. First value Index free in the table of the history of RMon statistics of the database.

•

Data Source, Owner, Priority or C-VID/S-VID. Respectively Ethernet port, user, priority or VLAN identifier of the instance just created for the count of the history of RMon statistics.

Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings. 2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab. 3. Select the instance you wish to delete. 4. Press Remove and confirm. The instance is deleted from the list.

282

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Settings contextual area This contextual area shows the status and RMon instances enabled for the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History). Tab

Ethernet Statistics tab. RMon instances per Port (Statistics group). Ethernet History tab. RMon instances per Port (History group). Ethernet Service Statistics tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN (Statistics group). Ethernet Service History tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN (History group). Parameters

RMON Status. Status of the count of the statistics and of the history of the statistics for all the RMon instance set by the user: •

Enabled. The count is active.

•

Disabled. The count is not active.

Push-button

Refresh. Updates the context. Help. Open the help on-line. See also

Settings (command) RMon standard (info) Activate the count of the RMon statistics Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics

Ethernet Statistics tab The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics). Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated: Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the RMon statistics. Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics for the specific instance. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the instance.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

283

Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. The selection of

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the table with respect to the value present in the specific column. Command available only for Index column. Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of the table with respect to the value present in the specific column. Command available only for Index column. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button

Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics

Ethernet History tab The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the history of the RMon statistics (group History). Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated: Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the RMon instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics. Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of the RMon statistics history is associated to. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance. Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Persistence. Status of automatic storing of RMon statistics: •

Disable. Automatic storing inactive.

•

Enable. Automatic storing active.

Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics history. Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. The selection of

284

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the table with respect to the value present in the specific column. Command available only for Index column. Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of the table with respect to the value present in the specific column. Command available only for Index column. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button

Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics

Ethernet Service Statistics tab The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN enabled for the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics). Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated: Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the RMon statistics. Data source.Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics for the specific instance. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the port. Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority. SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality. CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality. Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. Push-button

Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

285

Ethernet Service History tab The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN enabled for the count of the history of the RMon statistics (group History). Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated: Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics. Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the history of RMon statistics for the specific instance. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance. Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one. Persistence. Status of automatic storing of RMon statistics: •

Disable. Automatic storing inactive.

•

Enable. Automatic storing active.

Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics history. Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority. SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality. CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality. Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on. Push-button

Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics

286

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

RMon standard (info)

RMon Standard

RMon (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count, monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network. These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any further detail. Outline on the operation

RMon standard is based on two components: an agent (RMon probe) and a client (remote management station). The agent saves the data within its own RMon tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers, etc.). The RMon probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves. The remote management station communicates with the RMon agent to obtain and correlate the RMon data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and the analysis of the collected RMon data. Management from Web LCT

The Rmon functionality available in WEB LCT allows monitoring the status of the Ethernet Switch ports in compliance with the RMON standard. With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality acts as client which, through the commands present in the GUI, allows the analysis and the management of the data collected by the probes. The probes are present at level of: Port (line/radio) of the Ethernet Switch (RMon instance per Port). This instance allows monitoring all the traffic in input/output to/from one port of the Ethernet Switch. VLAN (RMon instance Port & VLAN). This instance allows monitoring only the traffic in input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given VLAN identifier (C-VID or S-VID according to the Bridge operating modality). Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority). This instance allows monitoring only the traffic in input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given priority value (Internal Priority). The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMon table of the equipment. Currently, the equipment implements the RMON MIB groups Statistics and History. RMON MIB group: Statistics

Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the current statistics measured by the RMon probes (see Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) and Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN). To display the counters of an instance, it is necessary to enable the involved instance (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics) and then activate the counting (see Activate the count of the RMon statistics). The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics. RMON MIB group: History

Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the evolution in time (history) of the statistics relevant to the counters in input/output of every monitored probes (see Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) and Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN). At equipment level, the value of the counters of the RMon probes is stored in the statistics history every x seconds (sampling interval) for a total number of samples to take programmable from 1 to 240. The equipment stores these data into a circular buffer where, when full, the new information replaces the old one.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

287

In order to memorize in the database and display the statistics history of one instance, it is necessary to activate the instance (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics and Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics) and then activate the count (see Activate the count of the RMon statistics). The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics). When an instance is activated, the supervision system starts memorizing the data relevant to the statistics and makes them available to the user, in table format, subdivided for single RMon instance. When an instance is created, it is possible to set if the data must be automatically stored or not (parameter Persistence). The storing modes are described here below. Limits

Tab.10 RMon instances limits STATISTICS (current counters)

Counters Instances

per Port

Recommended limits

per Port & Priority

HISTORY (stored counters)

per Port & VLAN

74 10

64

40

per Port

per Port & Priority

per Port & VLAN

74 from 1 minutes from 240 bucket each

WARNING If the number of created instances is the recommended one or lower, but the processing requires a time greater than that defined in one’s browser for the script processing, the WEB LCT page displays a warning window.

The window contains the buttons to continue the script processing or to stop it (see the documentation relevant to one’s browser). In this case, the use of CLI interface (application SM-OS) to display the counters or the enabling of the Persistance function (automatic archive of RMon statistics) and the export via FTP of the results on CSV file are suggested. See also

Settings (command) Ethernet Statistics (command) Ethernet Service Statistics (command) Ethernet History (command) Ethernet Service History (command)

288

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Ethernet Statistics User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Statistics displays the current values of the RMon statistic. The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port). Operations

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) GUI

Ethernet Statistics contextual area See also

RMon standard (info)

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one Ethernet port is enabled for the count and if the count

of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics). 1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Statistics. The Ethernet Statistics contextual area displays the value of the RMon counters for every RMon instance per Port.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

289

Ethernet Statistics contextual area The contextual area displays the current values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port). Table

Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance: •

Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the RMon statistics.

•

Owner. User who has enabled the instance.

The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.11). . Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of RMon statistics for the specific RMon instance per Port. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B.

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

Every port (RMon instance) corresponds to a column where the results of the relevant RMon counters are displayed. Push-button

Help. Open the help on line. Refresh. Update the table of counters. See also

Ethernet Statistics (command) RMon standard (info)

290

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Tab.11 RMon counters (Ethernet Statistics - RMon instance per Port) Packets with length lower than 64 octects (Undersize packet)

Packet with length longer than n (MTU value) octets (Oversize packet)

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Drop Events Number of dropped packets **

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Octets Number of received octets

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Pkts Number of received packets

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

BroadcastPkts Number of packets received directed to the broadcast addresses

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

MulticastPkts Number of packets received directed to a multicast addresses

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

UndersizePkts Number of Undersize packets received

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

OversizePkts Number of Oversize packets received

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

KO

Fragments Number of Undersize packets received

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

CRC Align Errors Number of Good and Oversize packets received

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Pkts 64 Octets Number of packets transmitted/received with 64 octets in length

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

KO

Pkts 65 to 127 Number of packets transmitted/received with length between 65 and 127 octets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

KO

Pkts 128 to 255 Octets Number of packets transmitted/received with length between 128 and 255 octet)

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

KO

Pkts 256 to 511 Octets Number of packets transmitted/received with length between 256 and 511 octets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

KO

Pkts 512 to 1023 Octets Number of packets transmitted/received with length between 512 and 1023 octets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

KO

Pkts > 1024 Octets Number of packets transmitted/received with length equal to or greater than 1024 octets

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Counter Description

Packet with length between 64 and n (MTU value) octets (Good packet)

x Counter incremented. - Counter not incremented. * OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct. KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error). ** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other reasons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

291

FCS *

Ethernet Service Statistics User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Service Statistics displays the current values of RMon statistic counters. The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and the packet characteristics: value of User Priority (RMon instances Port & Priority) or C-TAG identifier or S-TAG identifier (RMon instances Port & VLAN). Operations

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) GUI

Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area See also

RMon standard (info)

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is enabled for the count and if the count of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service Statistics. The Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area displays the value of RMon counters for every RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN.

292

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN). Table

Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance: •

Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the RMon statistics.

•

Owner. User who has enabled the RMon instance.

•

Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted in the RMon statistics. Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.

•

SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.

•

CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.12). . Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics for the specific RMon instances. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B.

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

Every RMon instance corresponds to one column where are indicated the characteristics of the instance and the results of the relevant RMon counters. Push-button

Help. Open the help on line. Refresh. Update the table of counters. See also

Ethernet Service Statistics (command) RMon standard (info)

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

293

Tab.12 RMon counters (Ethernet Service Statistics and Ethernet Service History - RMon instances Port & Priority e Port & VLAN) WARNING The counters per service (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) include even frames

received with wrong FCS or frames too long. The condition can be checked using the counters per port (RMon instances per Port). Packets (Tagged or Untagged) with length lower than 64 octects (Undersize packet)

Packet (Tagged or Packet (Tagged or Untagged) with Untagged) with length longer than n length between 64 (MTU value) octets and n (MTU value) oc(Oversize packet) tets (Good packet)

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Received Pkts Total number of Good and Oversize packets received

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Sent Pkts Total number of transmitted packets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Octects Total number of received octets

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Sent Octects Total number of transmitted octets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Discard Pkts Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due to forbidden forwarding or policing violation.

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Sent Discard Pkts Total number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. Possible reasons for discarding such a packet could buffer space lack due to output shaping, rate limitation or egress MTU exceeded.

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Unicast Pkts Total number of inbound Unicast packets

-

-

-

x

-

-

x

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

-

-

x

-

-

KO

Sent Unicast Pkts Total number of outbound Unicast packets

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Received Not Unicast Pkts Total number of inbound Non-Unicast packets

-

-

-

-

x

x

-

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

x

x

-

x

x

KO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Counter Description

Sent Not Unicast Pkts Total number of outbound Non-Unicast packets x Counter incremented - Counter not incremented.

* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct. KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

294

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

FCS *

Ethernet History User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet History displays the history of the RMon statistics. The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port). Operations

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) GUI

Ethernet History contextual area See also

RMon standard (info)

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon

statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics). 1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History. The Ethernet History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all instances per Port. In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).

Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History. 2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic: •

Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history of RMon statistics (indexes) for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.

•

Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.

•

Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling interval in table.

To activate an index, port or user, select the relevant box ( box ( ).

), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant

It is possible to activate more indexes/ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users. 3. Press Apply Filter. 4. To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users, press Remove Filter.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

295

Ethernet History contextual area The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port). Table

Every line of the table corresponds to a sampling interval of an instance for which is indicated: Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected. Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the RMon instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics. Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of the statistics history is associated to. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. User who has enabled the instance. The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.13). The selection of

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

Sort Ascending. Not available in this context. Sort Descending. Not available in this context. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

Parameters

FILTERING Criteria available to filter the sampling interval in the table. The filter criteria works in AND logic: Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history of RMon statistics). Source. Ports of the Switch. Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances. For every criterion, the active box ( ) indicates that the table contains sampling intervals matching the specific criterion. The inactive box ( ) indicates that the table contains no sampling interval matching the specific criterion. Push-button

Help. Open the help on line. Refresh. Update the context. Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) See also

Ethernet History (command) RMon standard (info)

296

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Tab.13 RMon counters (Ethernet History - RMon instance per Port) Packets with length lower than 64 octects (Undersize packet)

Packet with length longer than n (MTU value) octets (Oversize packet)

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Uni cast

Broad cast

Multi cast

Drop Events Number of dropped packets **

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

Octets Number of received octets

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

Pkts Number of received packets

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

OK

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

BroadcastPkts Number of packets received directed to the broadcast addresses

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

MulticastPkts Number of packets received directed to a multicast addresses

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

x

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

UndersizePkts Number of Undersize packets received

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

OversizePkts Number of Oversize packets received

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

-

-

-

KO

Fragments Number of Undersize packets received

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

x

x

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

KO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

OK

-

-

-

x

x

x

x

x

x

KO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Counter Description

CRC Align Errors Number of Good and Oversize packets received Utilization (%) Estimate (expressed in percentage) of the average use of the port during the sampling interval. The percentage of use refers to the line rate of the associated porta. The percentage of use of the radio port refers to the rate of 2.5 Gbps

Packet with length between 64 and n (MTU value) octets (Good packet)

x Counter incremented - Counter not incremented. * OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct. KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error). ** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other reasons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

297

FCS *

Ethernet Service History User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Service History displays the history of the RMon statistics. The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and to the characteristics of the packet: value of User Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority) or C-TAG or S-TAG identifier (RMon instance Port & VLAN). Operations

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) GUI

Ethernet Service History contextual area See also

RMon standard (info)

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin. WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon

statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics). 1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History. The Ethernet Service History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all Port & Priority and Port & VLAN instances. In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) according to different criteria.

Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History. 2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic: •

Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history of RMon statistics (indexes) for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.

•

Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.

•

Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling interval in table.

To activate an index, port or user, select the relevant box ( box ( ).

), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant

It is possible to activate more indexes/ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users. 3. Press Apply Filter. 4. To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the indexes/ports/users, press Remove Filter.

298

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Ethernet Service History contextual area The contextual area displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN). Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one sampling interval of one instance for which is indicated: Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected. Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the RMon instance in the database table of history of RMon statistics. Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of the statistics history is associated to. The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number) followed by the port name: •

LAN 1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

•

LAN 3. Third line of Ethernet port (electrical) (management port).

•

LAN 4. Fourth line Ethernet port (electrical).

•

LAN 5. Fifth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN 6. Sixth line Ethernet port (optical).

•

ODU A. Ethernet port to the Radio A.

•

ODU B. Ethernet port to the Radio B. Port available only for equipment with more ODU (see Tab.4).

•

LAN C. Seventh line Ethernet port (optical).

•

LAN D. Eighth line Ethernet port (optical).

Owner. User who has enabled the instance. Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority. SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality. CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics. Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & VLAN when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality. The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.12). The selection of

present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:

Sort Ascending. Not available in this context. Sort Descending. Not available in this context. Columns. Activate (

) or deactivate (

) the display of a column in the table.

Parameters

FILTERING Criteria available to filter the sampling interval in the table. The filter criteria works in AND logic: Index. Values which identify in unique mode the RMon instances in the database table of history of RMon statistics). Source. Ports of the Switch. Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances. For every criterion, the active box ( ) indicates that the table contains sampling intervals matching the specific criterion. The inactive box ( ) indicates that the table contains no sampling interval matching the specific criterion.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

299

Push-button

Help. Open the help on line. Refresh. Update the context. Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) See also

Ethernet Service History (command) RMon standard (info)

300

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

ALARM IN/OUT

Alarm Input. It manages the User Input (local and remote). Alarm Output. It manages the User Output.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

301

Alarm Input User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Alarm Input command manages the configuration of the local User Input and remote User Input. Operations

Verify the User Input status and configuration Modify the name of an User Input Modify the rest condition of a local User Input Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input GUI

Alarm Input contextual area See also

User Input (info)

Verify the User Input status and configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Input. The Alarm Input contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local and remote User Inputs.

Modify the name of an User Input User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Input. The Label column displays the name of the User Inputs. 2. To change the name of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the rest condition of a local User Input User Profile | Read/Write, Admin. WARNING It is not possible to modify the rest condition of one remote user input. The rest condition is set only locally.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Input. The Input Operation column shows the rest condition of the local User Inputs. 2. To change the rest condition of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value: •

302

Normally Open. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its terminal is referred to ground.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

•

Normally Close. The User Input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its terminal is open.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Input. The Severity column shows the status/severity of the User Inputs alarms. 2. To change the status/severity of a User Input, double-click on the relevant box and set the value: •

Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the User Input.

•

Status, to:

•

•

•

•

•

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

•

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.

Warning, to: •

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

•

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Warning level.

Minor, to: •

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

•

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Minor level.

Major, to: •

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

•

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Major level.

Critical, to: •

Enable the alarm created at the activation of the User Input.

•

Couple, with the input signal to the User Input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Critical level.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

303

Alarm Input contextual area The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of local and remote User Inputs. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one User Input for which are indicated: Label. User Input name. Status. User Input status: •

Inactive (green box). User Input alarm not activated.

•

Active (green box). User Input status signal activated.

•

Active (light blue box). User Input alarm activated and with Warning severity level.

•

Active (yellow box). User Input alarm activated and with Minor severity level.

•

Active (orange box). User Input alarm activated and with Major severity level.

•

Active (red box). User Input alarm activated and with Critical severity level.

Severity. Status/seriousness of the alarm created at the activation of the User Input: •

Disable. The alarm is disabled.

•

Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.

•

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.

Input Operation. Rest condition of the User Input: •

Normally Open. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is referred to ground.

•

Normally Close. The User Input is considered active when its terminal is open.

Parameter available only for the local User Input. Side. User Input type: •

Local. Local User Input.

•

Remote. Remote User Input.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. See also

Alarm Input (command) User Input (info) Modify the name of an User Input Modify the rest condition of a local User Input Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input

304

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

User Input (info) The User Input (UI) is a signal in input to the local equipment through the connector ALARM and whose status is reported as alarm event or status signal to the management program (e.g. WEB LCT). The signal can even be associated to one User Output to forward to outside the alarm condition associated to the UI. The User Inputs can be distinguished into local User Inputs and remote User Input. Local User Input

The local User Inputs are signals which directly enter into the local equipment and whose status (open or closed) can be set. Remote User Input

The remote User Inputs are signal which enter into the remote equipment, are delivered outside of the remote equipment (User Output) and forwarded to the local equipment. For these signals, the rest condition cannot be locally set because they inherit the condition assigned in the remote equipment. User Input alarm

The alarm condition associated to a local or remote User Input locale (User Input alarm) can be enabled or disabled. Disabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm has never occurred. On the other hand, enabling an User Input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current alarms and in the alarm history. See also

Alarm Input (command) Alarm Input contextual area Verify the User Input status and configuration Modify the name of an User Input Modify the rest condition of a local User Input Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity of an User Input

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

305

Alarm Output User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Alarm Output command manages the User Output configuration. Operations

Verify the User Output status and configuration Modify the name of an User Output Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output Force the User Output activation Remove the forcing of the User Output GUI

Alarm Output contextual area See also

User Output (info)

Verify the User Output status and configuration User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. The Alarm Output contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs.

Modify the name of an User Output User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. The Label column shows the name of the User Outputs. 2. To modify the name of an User Output, double click on the relevant box and type an alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. The Active Status column shows the operating modality of the relay contacts of the User Output. 2. To modify the parameter, double click on the relevant box and select the option:

306

•

Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open

•

Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output User Profile | Very: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. 2. Press Change in the Alarms Binding box. The Mapping window lists the alarms and the User Inputs of the equipment. For every alarm, the column Alarm displays the name and the column Group displays the group which the alarm belongs to (see Tab.14). The active box ( ) indicates that the alarm is associated to the User Output; the inactive box indicates that the alarm is not associated. Activating the option Show only checked item(s), the list will be filtered displaying only the alarms whose box is active. 3. Activate or deactivate the boxes relevant to the alarms or to the User Input (Alarm Input) you wish to associate to the User Output. 4. Press Ok and confirm.

Force the User Output activation User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. 2. Double click on the Force box and select the Forced option. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm. The User Output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing.

Remove the forcing of the User Output User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Alarm In/Out > Alarm Output. 2. Double click on the Force box and select the Unforced option. Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed. 3. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

307

Alarm Output contextual area The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the User Outputs. Table

Every row of the table corresponds to one User Output for which are indicated: Label. User Output name. Status. User Output status: •

Inactive (green box). User Output not activated.

•

Active (red box). User Output activated (relay contacts activated).

•

Active (Forced) (red box). User Output is active after the forcing by operator.

Alarms Binding. User Output setting: •

Unbound. No signal is associated to User Output.

•

Bound. One or more signals are associated to User Output (group of alarms and/or User Input). Press Change to verify the signals.

Active State. Functioning mode of the relay contacts: •

Open. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open

•

Closed. With absence of signal (alarm or User Input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.

Force. Status of the forcing of the User Output: •

Unforced. User Output is not active after the forcing by the operator.

•

Forced. User Output is active after the forcing by operator.

Push-button

Refresh. Update the context. Help. Open the help on-line. Apply changes. Confirm the changes. Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet. Refresh status. Update the User Output status. Change. Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output. See also

Alarm Output (command) User Output (info) Modify the name of an User Output Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output Force the User Output activation Remove the forcing of the User Output

308

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

User Output (info) The User Output is a signal which the local equipment makes available outside, through the connector ALARM, to forward alarms. One or more equipment alarms and/or alarms coming from outside (User Input) can be associated to an User Output. In this way, when at least one of the alarms associated to the User Output becomes active, the alarm condition will be signalled outside by the activation of the User Output. See also

Alarm Output (command) Alarm Output contextual area Verify the User Output status and configuration Modify the name of an User Output Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output Force the User Output activation Remove the forcing of the User Output

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

309

ALARMS LIST Tab.14 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment. The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts of the equipment. Equipment COMMON ETH LAN IDU P.M. ACM P.M. G.828 P.M. Rx Power P.M. Tx Power Plug-in module Queue Depth RADIO SETS UNIT

For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the GUI and the wording present in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area are displayed. Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm displayed in the Events area, represent a variable. The symbol “-“means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area.

310

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Tab.14 - Alarms list Events area

Alarm Severity Config. alarms

Equipment Alarm Input

alarmInput

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical

-

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major

-

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor

-

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning

-

COMMON Equip Manual Operation

equipManualOperation

NMS Wake Up Alarm

equipManagerWakeUpAlarm

ETH LAN Loss of Signal Alarm

ifextLosAlarm

IDU Local IDU Alarm Synthesis

linkLocalIduAlarmSynthesis

Modulator Fail Alarm

radioModulatorFailAlarm

Demodulator Fail Alarm

radioDemodulatorFailAlarm

Remote Demodulator Fail Alarm

radioRemDemodulatorFailAlarm

IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm

radioCableOpenAlarm

IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm

radioCableShortAlarm

Local IDU Alarm Synthesis

linkLocalIduAlarmSynthesis

IDU Board Trib. # () signal loss Alarm

ppiLosAlarm

IDU Board Trib. # () AIS Alarm

ppiRxAisAlarm

IDU Board Trib. # () synchronisation Alarm

ppiE1SyncAlarm

PRBS Fail Alarm

ppiPrbsFailAlarm

Link Loss Forwarding Alarm

llfAlarm

POE Zero Current Alarm

poeZeroCurrentAlarm

POE Over Current Alarm

poeOverCurrentAlarm

Power Supply Alarm

pwrSupplyAlarm

P.M. ACM P.M. ACM 15M counter threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM 24H counter threshold cross Alarm

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

acmsTpProfile24HAlarm

311

Events area

Alarm Severity Config. alarms

P.M. G.828 P.M. G.828 15M counter ES threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-15MEsAlarm

P.M. G.828 15M counter SEP threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-15MSepAlarm

P.M. G.828 15M counter SES threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-15MSesAlarm

P.M. G.828 24H counter ES threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-24HEsAlarm

P.M. G.828 24H counter SEP threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-24HSepAlarm

P.M. G.828 24H counter SES threshold cross Alarm

pmG828-24HSesAlarm

P.M. G.828 UAS Alarm

pmG828-UASAlarm

P.M. Rx Power P.M. RxPower 15M counter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm

P.M. RxPower 15M counter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-15MRlts2Alarm

P.M. RxPower 15M counter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-15MRlts3Alarm

P.M. RxPower 15M counter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-15MRlts4Alarm

P.M. RxPower 15M counter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-15MRlts5Alarm

P.M. RxPower 24H counter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm

P.M. RxPower 24H counter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm

P.M. RxPower 24H counter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-24HRlts3Alarm

P.M. RxPower 24H counter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-24HRlts4Alarm

P.M. RxPower 24H counter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm

pmRxPwr-24HRlts5Alarm

P.M. Tx Power P.M. TxPower 15M counter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm

P.M. TxPower 15M counter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm

P.M. TxPower 15M counter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-15MTlts3Alarm

P.M. TxPower 15M counter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-15MTlts4Alarm

P.M. TxPower 24H counter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm

P.M. TxPower 24H counter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm

P.M. TxPower 24H counter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-24HTlts3Alarm

P.M. TxPower 24H counter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm

pmTxPwr-24HTlts4Alarm

Plug-in module Plug-in module Fail Alarm

plug-inModuleAlarm

Queue Depth Queue Depth Profile Mismatch Alarm

qdProfileMismatchAlarm

RADIO Invalid Frequency Alarm

radioInvalidFrequencyAlarm

Rx Power Low Alarm

radioRxPowerLowAlarm

Tx Power Alarm

radioTxPowerAlarm

Vco Fail Alarm

radioRtVcoFail

312

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Events area

Alarm Severity Config. alarms

Rx AGC Alarm

radioRxAGCAlarm

Tx AGC Alarm

radioTxAGCAlarm

IDU ODU Communication Alarm

radioIduOduCommunicationAlarm

ODU IDU Communication Alarm

radioOduIduCommunicationAlarm

Local alarm synthesis

radioLocalOduAlarmSynthesis

Remote alarm synthesis

radioRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis

Configuration parameter Mismatch Alarm

radioConfigMismatch

Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm

radioRxQualityLowAlarm

Radio Rx Quality Warning Alarm

radioRxQualityWarningAlarm

Rx Active Status

radioRxActiveStatus

Tx Active Status

radioTxActiveStatus

Radio Link Telemetry Fail Alarm

linkLinkTelemetryFailAlarm

Radio Link Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification

linkReducedCapacityAlarm

Radio Link ID Alarm

linkIdAlarm

Radio Link Radio EOC Alarm

linkRadioEocAlarm

Radio Link Setup Mismatch Alarm

linkSetupMismatchAlarm

Radio Link Rescue Modulation Setup Alarm

linkRescueSetupAlarm

Radio Link FMP: Xpic disable

linkXpicProcedureBlockAlarm

Radio Link FMP: Tx Off Under Remote End Request

linkXpicRemTxOffAlarm

Radio Link Remote IDU Alarm Synthesis

linkRemoteIduAlarmSynthesis

Radio Branches No Matching Radios Parameters

linkNoMatchingRadiosAlarm

Radio Link Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER

linkTfcAlarm

L1 Aggregation Fail Alarm

aggrL1FailAlarm

L1 Aggregation Degrade Alarm

aggrL1DegradeAlarm

L1 Aggregation Realignment Alarm

aggrL1RealignmentAlarm

SETS BASE BAND Sets Active Status

timingSynkActiveStatus

BASE BAND Sets Drift Alarm

timingSynkDriftAlarm

BASE BAND Sets LTI Alarm

timingSynkLossAlarm

BASE BAND Sets Free Running Status

timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus

BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status

timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus

BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm

timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm

BASE BAND Sets T4 Squelch Alarm

timingGeneratorT4SquelchAlarm

BASE BAND Sets Active Status

timingGeneratorActiveStatus

UNIT Unit Fail Alarm

unitFailAlarm

Unit Missing Alarm

unitMissingAlarm

Unit Not Responding Alarm

unitNotRespondingAlarm

Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm

unitHwMismatchAlarm

Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm

unitSwMismatchAlarm

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

313

Events area

Alarm Severity Config. alarms

Temperature threshold 1 exceeded Alarm

tempSensorAlarmThreshold1

Temperature threshold 2 exceeded Alarm

tempSensorAlarmThreshold2

Fans Alarm

fansAlarm

314

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

OPERATIONS LIST

A Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................125 Alarms Change the severity of an alarm ........................................................................................... 79 Delete the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................. 59 Enable/disable an alarm ...................................................................................................... 78 Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .............................................................. 78 Save the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................... 58 Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ......................................... 78 ATPC Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................240 Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................241 Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................241 Range of the ATPC regulation, verify/modify .........................................................................241 Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission for every ACM profile, display ......242

B Basic configuration of the equipment, verify ................................................................................ 37 Bridge Mode Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ......................................................................139 Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .......................................................................139

C Communication protocol Enable/disable the administrative status of a communication protocol .......................................109 Verify the operating status of the communication protocols .....................................................109

D Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................. 59 Duplexer frequency, verify/modify ............................................................................................239

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

315

E E1 Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..........................................................................................209 Activate/deactivate the E1 use ............................................................................................208 Modify the label of an E1 ....................................................................................................208 Modify the management status of LOS alarm ........................................................................209 Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ........................................................................208 Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................................... 38 Equipment configuration Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) ............................................................................ 74 Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ............................................... 73 Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ........................... 74 Equipment firmware Switch the memory benches ................................................................................................ 67 Equipment identifier, modify ..................................................................................................... 37 Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 38 Equipment software reset .................................................................................................... 37, 68 Equipment software/firmware Update .............................................................................................................................. 66 Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 66 Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 39 Ethernet ports Activate the loop on line side of a port ..................................................................................142 Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ..............................................................................142 Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port ....................................................142 Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ..................................................................................144 Modify the enabling status of a port .....................................................................................142 Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port .....................................................143 Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports ...........................................143 Modify the transmission speed of a port ................................................................................143 Modify the type of interface ................................................................................................141 Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port ...................................................................143 Verify the Ethernet ports configuration ......................................................................... 141, 144 Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .......................................................144 Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on its priority (User Priority) ........................................................................................................145 Execute the test (RF Loop) ......................................................................................................252

316

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

H Header Compression Enable/disable the functionality ...........................................................................................165 Verify the status of the functionality .....................................................................................165 Verify/modify the context depth to compress in the header of the Ethernet packets ....................165 Verify/modify the parsing mode applied to the header of the Ethernet packets ...........................166 HTTPS Download the SSL certificate in an equipment .......................................................................112 Generate the Certificate Signing Request for an equipment .....................................................112 Modify the list of CipherSuite managed by the equipment .......................................................111 Verify the configuration of the SSL protocol ...........................................................................111

I IP address of the agent SNMP, modify ........................................................................................ 37

L LAN Modify the operating mode of line synchronism (role) of the LAN’s, verify/modify .......................223 Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................128 LLF Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality .......................................................181 Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ..........................182 Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio .........................................................183 Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ............................................184 Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ........................................................................183 Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality ...............................................................183 Modify the propagation modality of LLF alarm ........................................................................184 Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality ....................................182 Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ......................182 Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ................................................181 Local User Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................303 Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................127

M MAN OP Activate/deactivate a radio loop ..........................................................................................260

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

317

Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ..........................................................................................262 Activate/reset the PRBS measure ........................................................................................263 Deactivate the PRBS measure .............................................................................................263 Disable temporarily/restore the XPIC function .......................................................................260 Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .....................................................................259 Disable/enable the operation of the RT power supply ..............................................................259 Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the PRBS measure .........................................................263 Force the management of the switching in reception ..............................................................260 Force the management of the switching in transmission ..........................................................261 Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................261 Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................262 Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..........................................................................................258 Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 33 Verify the manual operations status .....................................................................................258 Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 33 MNGT port Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port ............................................200 Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port ..............................199 Modify the enabling status of management port .....................................................................199 Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .....................................................................198 Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port ........................................................198 Modify the transmission speed of the management port ..........................................................200 Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision .............................................................199 Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port .............................................200 Verify the configuration of the management port ...................................................................198 Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .............................................163 Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................253

N Number of E1’s permanently allocated, verify/modify ..................................................................127

O Operating status of the adaptive modulation Modify .............................................................................................................................127 Verify ..............................................................................................................................125 Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................253 Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................253

318

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

P PB-VLAN Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ..........................................................160 Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ............................................................145 Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) .......................................160 PM Activate one or more measures ............................................................................................ 46 Deactivate one or more measures ........................................................................................ 46 Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures .......................................... 46 Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures .......................... 46 Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure ................................. 47 Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure ..................... 45 PRBS Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................248 Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................248 Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................................249 Modify the pattern type used for the measure .......................................................................248 Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................248 Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................248 PSU Enable/disable the PSU alarm ..............................................................................................267 Verify the enabling status of PSU alarm ................................................................................267

Q Queue Depth Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............................188 Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ...............................188

R Radio configuration Aggregate the Radio ports of a Link .....................................................................................121 Delete a Radio Link ............................................................................................................120 Modify a Radio Link ............................................................................................................120 Verify the Radio Link configuration .......................................................................................119 Radio Link label, verify/modify .................................................................................................131 Radio loop Activate ...........................................................................................................................251 Deactivate ........................................................................................................................252 Verify the status ................................................................................................................251

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

319

Radio switch Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............272 Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................270 Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................271 Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................271 Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................271 Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................270 Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................270 Reference band Modify .............................................................................................................................125 Verify ..............................................................................................................................125 Reference modulation Modify .............................................................................................................................126 Verify ..............................................................................................................................125 Remote equipment list Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 27 Add equipment .................................................................................................................. 28 Open the WEB page of equipment (Remote Link) .................................................................... 29 Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 27 Remove equipment ............................................................................................................. 28 Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 27 Reset ................................................................................................................................ 29 Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................240 Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................240 Restore Factory Default of the equipment ................................................................................... 68 RMon Activate the count of the RMon statistics ...............................................................................276 Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics ...........................................................................277 Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................280 Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics ........................................277 Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ..........................................................................................................................282 Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN for the count of the RMon statistics ..........279 Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance per Port & Priority and per Port & VLAN) 298 Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) ..........................................295 Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ..............................289 Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ....................................................................................................................292 Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & VLAN) ...............298 Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .............................................295 Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics .........................279 Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ..............................................277 Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the history of the RMON statistics ..........................................................................................................................280 Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & VLAN to the count of the RMon statistics ................278 Verify the count status of the RMon statistics ........................................................................276

320

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Routing Table Add an element to the Routing Table ....................................................................................204 Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ...........................................................205 Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ............................................................................204 RSTP Enable/disable the use of STP/RSTP protocol for the equipment ...............................................169 Verify the information stored by every single Switch port ........................................................174 Verify/modify the allocation of memory for the STP/RSTP function ...........................................170 Verify/modify the cost of the a port ......................................................................................173 Verify/modify the dynamic path cost calculation function (STP/RSTP) .......................................171 Verify/modify the enabling of STP/RSTP function ...................................................................171 Verify/modify the maximum number of BPDU packets in transmission ......................................172 Verify/modify the parameters for the transmission of BPDU packets .........................................172 Verify/modify the ports set for the STP/RSTP function ............................................................170 Verify/modify the priority assigned to the Switch ...................................................................172 Verify/modify the priority of a port .......................................................................................173 Verify/modify the status of the STP/RSTP function of a port ....................................................173 Verify/modify the version of the protocol ..............................................................................171

S S/N measure Update the value ...............................................................................................................246 Verify the value .................................................................................................................246 Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................................. 60 Save the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................... 59 Security Enable/disable the FTP and/or SFTP protocol .........................................................................115 Modify the FTP access credentials ........................................................................................115 Modify the SFTP access credentials ......................................................................................116 Verify the operating status of the FTP and SFTP protocols .......................................................115 Set of profile used by the adaptive modulation Modify .............................................................................................................................127 Statistics Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ......................................................193 Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) .......................................................................192 Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ............................192 Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) .............................................192 Synchronisation Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source ....................................................................220 Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism .....................219 Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source ......................................222 Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................218

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

321

Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................220 Modify the use priority of a synchronism source .....................................................................220 Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time .....................................................................................................................222 Re-time the E1’s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation .....................224 Set a synchronism source as preferential ..............................................................................221 Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for input T2 E1 .............................................222 Set the Hold Off Time parameter .........................................................................................218 Set the signal used as synchronism source for input T3 SYNCH ................................................221 Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm ..............................................................................218 Set the used as synchronism source for input TE SyncE A or TE SyncE B ...................................221 Set the WTR Time parameter ..............................................................................................218 Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources ................................................219 Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .......................................................217 Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN ........................................223 Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................................219 Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T3 SYNC/T2 E1 synchronism sources .... 223

T TDM matrix Delete one or more connections ..........................................................................................213 Display the connections of the equipment .............................................................................211 Execute a Radio-Radio connection .......................................................................................212 Execute a Tributary-Radio connection ...................................................................................211 Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ..............................................................................212 Execute the closing of a channel on itself (Loop) ....................................................................213 Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................131 Transmission frequency, verify/modify ......................................................................................239

U Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................127 User Input Modify the name ...............................................................................................................302 Modify the rest condition of a local User Input .......................................................................302 Verify the status and configuration ......................................................................................302 User Output Force the activation ...........................................................................................................307 Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts ..................................................................306 Modify the name ...............................................................................................................306 Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................307 Signal coupled, modify .......................................................................................................307

322

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Verify the status and configuration ......................................................................................306 Users Add a user ......................................................................................................................... 98 Add a user group ................................................................................................................ 83 Delete a user ....................................................................................................................100 Delete a user group ............................................................................................................ 85 Force the logout of a user ...................................................................................................106 Modify a user ..................................................................................................................... 99 Modify a user group ............................................................................................................ 84 Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login ......................................................................104 Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ..............................................................................104 Verify the user groups ......................................................................................................... 83 Verify the users connected to the equipment .........................................................................106 Verify the users list ............................................................................................................. 98

V Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................................... 38 Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ..............................................163 VLAN Create one or more static VLANs .........................................................................................155 Delete one or more static VLANs ..........................................................................................156 Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table .................................................152 Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................153 Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ............................154 Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ..............................................................................155 Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p received on the port .......................................................................................................................154 Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ............................................................154 Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses managed by the Switch for the VLAN’s ......................153 Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ............................................................153 Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management .........................................................152 Verify the existing static VLANs ...........................................................................................154

W Wake Up functionality Activate ............................................................................................................................ 62 Deactivate ......................................................................................................................... 63 Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................. 62 Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 62 WEB LCT page Close the page ................................................................................................................... 19 Display the page of equipment (Remote Link) ........................................................................ 25

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

323

Open more pages ............................................................................................................... 19 Open the page from Browser ............................................................................................... 18

X Xpic Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single ODU ...........................................................133 Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .........................................................134 Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ....................................................................134 Restore the XPIC function of the single ODU ..........................................................................133 Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function ........................................................133

324

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

PARAMETERS LIST

A

E

ACM Engine .............................................129

E1

ACM Table ...............................................130 Active Modulation ................................130 Ethernet Capacity ................................130 Global Capacity ...................................130 Max. TDM Capacity ..............................130 Agent IP Address .................................. 22, 40 Alarms ..................................................... 81

AIS Alarm ...........................................210 Enable ...............................................210 Internal Loop ......................................210 Line Loop ...........................................210 LOS Alarm ..........................................210 Los Inversion ......................................210 Tributary ............................................210 Equipment Feature

Group/Alarm ........................................ 80

Built-in fade margin .............................. 41

Severity .............................................. 80

Enhanced Eth monitoring ....................... 41

Trap Notification ................................... 80

Eth OAM enhanced ............................... 41 ETH transport ...................................... 41

ATPC ATPC Full Range ..................................244 ATPC Regulation ..................................244 ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx ...............244 Current Power .....................................244 Max Ptx ..............................................244 Tx Power Control .................................244

OSPF .................................................. 41 Packet processing (1) ............................ 41 Radio Aggregation ................................ 41 Security package .................................. 41 Sync Quality management ..................... 41 Upgrade up to 100Mbps ........................ 41 Upgrade up to 200Mbps ........................ 41 Upgrade up to 300Mbps ........................ 41 Upgrade up to 400Mbps ........................ 41

B Bandwidth ...............................................129 Bridge Mode ...................................... 22, 140

Upgrade up to 500Mbps ........................ 41 Upgrade up to 50Mbps .......................... 41 XPIC ................................................... 41 Equipment firmware Actual Release ..................................... 69 Bench Status ....................................... 69 Downloading Status .............................. 69

C

Release Bench 1 ................................... 70 Release Bench 2 ................................... 70

Carrier Only ..................................... 255, 264

Software ............................................. 69 Software Version .................................. 69 Unit .................................................... 69

D

Equipment ID ...................................... 22, 40

Dplx Freq ................................................243

Equipment Type ................................... 22, 40 Equipment unit Expected Type ..................................... 44 HW Ver. .............................................. 44

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

325

Par Part Number .................................. 44

Descr .................................................185

Part Number ........................................ 44

Link ID ...............................................185

Real Type ............................................ 44

LLF Status ..........................................185

Serial Number ...................................... 44

LOS to Circuit .....................................185

Unit Alarms ......................................... 44

Port ...................................................185 Protection Mode ..................................185

Ethernet Bridge Mode ................................ 40 EthType Description .........................................164 Egress EtherType ................................164

Signal Fail ..........................................185 Local Link ID ............................................130 Lower Profile ............................................130

Ingress EtherType ...............................164 Port ...................................................164

M MAC Address ............................................ 40

F Factory default .......................................... 70 Firmware Version ...................................... 40 Forced Switch ..........................................265

Manager IP Address 1 ...............................105 Manager IP Address 2 ...............................105 Measurements Resolution Prx ....................................................243

FTP protocol ............................................. 16

Ptx ....................................................243 MNGT port Admin State .......................................202 Auto Neg ............................................202

H

Default Gateway ..................................202

Header Compression

IP Address ..........................................202

Context Depth ....................................167

Link Status .........................................202

H.C. Status .........................................167

Net Mask ............................................202

Parsing Mode ......................................167

Port Alarm Report ................................202

Port ...................................................167

Speed ................................................202 VLAN ID .............................................202

Help Web Server ....................................... 16

P

I IP Address ................................................ 40

PB-VLAN Acceptable Frame Types .......................162 BPDU Priority ......................................151 COS Preservation ................................162

L

C-VLAN ID ..........................................161

Link Label ...............................................132

Dot1x ................................................151

Default User Priority .............................162 GMRP .................................................151

LLF

GVRP .................................................151 Alarm to Circuit ...................................185 Circuit ................................................185

IGMP .................................................151 Ingress Filtering ..................................162

Delay Time .........................................185

326

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

LACP .................................................151

PRBS

Port .................................... 151, 161, 162

2Mbit/s Selection .................................250

P-VID ................................................162

BER ...................................................250

STP ...................................................151

E1 Signal ............................................250

S-VID ................................................162

Elapsed Time ......................................250

S-VLAN ID ..........................................161

Errors ................................................250

Untagged CEP .....................................161

Fail Alarm ...........................................250

Untagged PEP .....................................161

Fail Alarms .........................................250 Start/Stop ..........................................250

Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................129 Port Manager Data Flow

Test Pattern ........................................250 Profile Management ..................................129

Description ....................................149 Flow Control Admin Status ...............149 Flow Control Oper Status .................149 Port ..............................................149 Description ................................. 146, 150

Q Queue Depth

Optical

Action ................................................190

Description ....................................148

Profile ................................................189

Fail Alarm ......................................148

Profile description ................................189

Link Length 50um (m) .....................149 Link Length 62.5um (m) ..................149 Link Length 9um (m) ......................149 Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps) ..................149 Port ..............................................148 Vendor Date ..................................148 Vendor Name .................................148 Vendor PN .....................................148 Vendor SN .....................................148 Wave Length (nm) ..........................148 Physical Admin State ...................................147 Auto Neg .......................................147 Bridge Port Type .............................147

R Radio Configurator Link Name ..........................................122 Link Type ...........................................122 Link# .................................................122 ODU Configuration ...............................122 Radio Loop ..............................................264 Radio switch

Duplex ..........................................147

Rx Forced Switch .................................273

Link Status ....................................147

Tx Forced Switch .................................273

MDI/MDIX .....................................147

Tx Preferential ....................................273

Media ............................................146 MTU ..............................................147 Port ..............................................146

Wait Time (m) ....................................273 Reference Modulation ................................129

Speed ...........................................147 Port ...................................................150 Priority 0 ............................................150

Remote Element Table ............................... 30 Remote equipment list ............................... 30

Priority 1 ............................................150 Priority 2 ............................................150 Priority 3 ............................................150 Priority 4 ............................................150 Priority 5 ............................................150 Priority 6 ............................................150 Priority 7 ............................................150

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

RMon Statistics RMON Status .................................283 Routing Table Destination .........................................206 Distance .............................................206

327

Gateway ............................................206 Interface ............................................206 Protocol .............................................206 Subnet Mask .......................................206 RSTP

Port ...................................................194 Status Control ..........................................264 Status signal ............................................. 81 Synchronisation

Dynamic Path Cost Calculation ..............175

1000Base-T Role

Dynamic Path Cost Lag-Speed ...............176

Description ....................................230

Enable Ports .......................................175

Media ............................................230

Forward Delay ....................................176

Port ..............................................230

Hello Time ..........................................176

Role ..............................................230

Max Age .............................................176

Alarms ...............................................225

Port Settings

E1 Retiming

Path Cost ......................................177

E1 Retiming ...................................231

Port Priority ...................................177

Name ............................................231

Port Role ............................... 177, 178

Sync Alarm ....................................231

RSTP Status ...................................177

Forced Switch .....................................227

Port Status

General

Designated Bridge ..........................179

Current .........................................226

Designated Cost .............................179

Status ...........................................226

Designated Port ..............................179

Hold Off Time ......................................225

Designated Root .............................179

Internal ..............................................226

Port State ......................................179

LAN SSM

Type .............................................179

Description ....................................228

Priority ...............................................176

Media ............................................229

Status ................................................175

Port ..............................................228

System Control ...................................175

Rx Dropped Packets ........................229

Tx Hold Count .....................................176

Rx Errored Packets .........................229

Version ..............................................176

Rx Pkts .........................................229 Rx Quality .....................................229

RT PSU ........................................... 255, 264

SSM Enable ...................................229 Tx Pkts ..........................................229

Rx Forced ................................................264 Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................132

Tx Quality ......................................229 LTI Reset Time ....................................225 LTI Set Time .......................................225 Name .................................................226 ODU/LAN A .........................................226

S

ODU/LAN B .........................................226 ODU/LAN C .........................................226

S/N ........................................................247 Service Name .................................. 113, 117 Service Status .........................................117

ODU/LAN D ........................................226 Preferential Switch ...............................227 Priority ...............................................227 SA Bit T2 E1 ............................................231

Services Status Config Admin Status ......................................110 Operative Status .................................110 Service Name .....................................110 Statistics Descr .................................................194

328

T3 SYNC ........................................231 Status Control .....................................225 Sync Loss ...........................................227 T0 Ovw Rx Qlty ...................................227 Ovw Tx Qlty ...................................228 Rx Quality .....................................227

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

Source ..........................................227

SNMP ............................................. 86

Tx Quality ......................................227

SSH ............................................... 86

T2 E1 .................................................226

Priv ...................................................101

T3 SYNC ............................................226

Timeout .............................................101

TE SyncE A .........................................226

User ..................................................101

TE SyncE B .........................................226 WTR Time ..........................................225 System Date/Time ..................................... 40 System Up Time ........................................ 40

V VLAN Acceptable Frame Types .......................158 Default User Priority .............................159

T

Description .......................... 158, 177, 178

Tx Forced ................................................264

Global MAC Learning Status ..................157

Ether Type ..........................................159 Ingress Filtering ..................................158

Tx Freq ...................................................243

Learning Mode ....................................157 MAC Add. Table Aging Time ..................157

Tx Transmitter ................................. 255, 264

Max Supported VLAN ...........................157 Max. VLAN ID .....................................157 Member Ports .....................................159

U

Num of VLANs in the System .................158 Port .................................... 158, 177, 178

Upper Profile ...........................................130

PVID ..................................................159 Unicast MAC Learning Limit ...................157

User Input

Untagged Ports ...................................159

Input Operation ..................................304

VLAN ID .............................................159

Label .................................................304 Severity .............................................304 Side ..................................................304 Status ................................................304 User Output Active State ........................................308

W Wake Up NE Location ......................................... 64

Alarms Binding ....................................308

NMS IP Address .................................... 64

Force .................................................308

Status ................................................. 64

Label .................................................308

Timeout (Minutes) ................................ 64

Status ................................................308

WEB LCT

Users

Product Code ....................................... 40

Auth ..................................................101

Release ............................................... 11

Group ................................................101

Version ............................................... 40

Groups CLI ................................................ 86

WEB LCT Console ...................................... 16

FTP ................................................ 86 HTTP ............................................. 86 HTTPS ............................................ 86 Name ............................................. 86 Profile ..................................... 86, 101 SFTP .............................................. 86

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

X Xpic ........................................................264

329

Fault Management Procedure ................135 ODU A ...............................................135 ODU A FMP Tx Off Under Remote End Request 135 ODU A FMP Xpic Disable .......................135 ODU B ...............................................135 ODU B FMP Xpic Disable ...................................135

330

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

ASSISTANCE SERVICE For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002

331

332

WEB LCT AGS-20 - Release 1.1 - MN.00327.E - 002